The arte of prophecying, or, A treatise concerning the sacred and onely true manner and methode of preaching first written in Latine by Master William Perkins ; and now faithfully translated into English (for that it containeth many worthie things fit for the knowledge of men of all degrees) by Thomas Tuke.
         Prophetica, sive, De sacra et vnica ratione concionandi tractatus. English
         Perkins, William, 1558-1602.
      
       
         
           1607
        
      
       Approx. 182 KB of XML-encoded text transcribed from 83 1-bit group-IV TIFF page images.
       
         Text Creation Partnership,
         Ann Arbor, MI ; Oxford (UK) :
         2004-11 (EEBO-TCP Phase 1).
         A09449
         STC 19735.4
         ESTC S4414
         24364969
         ocm 24364969
         27583
         
           
            This keyboarded and encoded edition of the work described above is co-owned by the institutions providing financial support to the Early English Books Online Text Creation Partnership. This Phase I text is available for reuse, according to the terms of
             Creative Commons 0 1.0 Universal
            . The text can be copied, modified, distributed and performed, even for commercial purposes, all without asking permission.
          
        
      
       
         Early English books online.
      
       
         (EEBO-TCP ; phase 1, no. A09449)
         Transcribed from: (Early English Books Online ; image set 27583)
         Images scanned from microfilm: (Early English books, 1475-1640 ; 1823:9)
      
       
         
           
             The arte of prophecying, or, A treatise concerning the sacred and onely true manner and methode of preaching first written in Latine by Master William Perkins ; and now faithfully translated into English (for that it containeth many worthie things fit for the knowledge of men of all degrees) by Thomas Tuke.
             Prophetica, sive, De sacra et vnica ratione concionandi tractatus. English
             Perkins, William, 1558-1602.
             Tuke, Thomas, d. 1657.
          
           [10], 148 p.
           
             By Felix Kyngston for E.E. and are to be sold in Pauls Church-yard at the signe of the Swan,
             Imprinted at London :
             1607.
          
           
             Translation of: Prophetica.--Cf. NUC pre-1956 imprints.
             Signatures: A-K⁸ (last leaf blank).
             "The analysis of the whole booke" (1 sheet) inserted between p. [10] and p. 1.
             Reproduction of original in the Harvard University Library.
          
        
      
    
     
       
         Created by converting TCP files to TEI P5 using tcp2tei.xsl, TEI @ Oxford.
         Re-processed by University of Nebraska-Lincoln and Northwestern, with changes to facilitate morpho-syntactic tagging. Gap elements of known extent have been transformed into placeholder characters or elements to simplify the filling in of gaps by user contributors.
      
       
         EEBO-TCP is a partnership between the Universities of Michigan and Oxford and the publisher ProQuest to create accurately transcribed and encoded texts based on the image sets published by ProQuest via their Early English Books Online (EEBO) database (http://eebo.chadwyck.com). The general aim of EEBO-TCP is to encode one copy (usually the first edition) of every monographic English-language title published between 1473 and 1700 available in EEBO.
         EEBO-TCP aimed to produce large quantities of textual data within the usual project restraints of time and funding, and therefore chose to create diplomatic transcriptions (as opposed to critical editions) with light-touch, mainly structural encoding based on the Text Encoding Initiative (http://www.tei-c.org).
         The EEBO-TCP project was divided into two phases. The 25,363 texts created during Phase 1 of the project have been released into the public domain as of 1 January 2015. Anyone can now take and use these texts for their own purposes, but we respectfully request that due credit and attribution is given to their original source.
         Users should be aware of the process of creating the TCP texts, and therefore of any assumptions that can be made about the data.
         Text selection was based on the New Cambridge Bibliography of English Literature (NCBEL). If an author (or for an anonymous work, the title) appears in NCBEL, then their works are eligible for inclusion. Selection was intended to range over a wide variety of subject areas, to reflect the true nature of the print record of the period. In general, first editions of a works in English were prioritized, although there are a number of works in other languages, notably Latin and Welsh, included and sometimes a second or later edition of a work was chosen if there was a compelling reason to do so.
         Image sets were sent to external keying companies for transcription and basic encoding. Quality assurance was then carried out by editorial teams in Oxford and Michigan. 5% (or 5 pages, whichever is the greater) of each text was proofread for accuracy and those which did not meet QA standards were returned to the keyers to be redone. After proofreading, the encoding was enhanced and/or corrected and characters marked as illegible were corrected where possible up to a limit of 100 instances per text. Any remaining illegibles were encoded as <gap>s. Understanding these processes should make clear that, while the overall quality of TCP data is very good, some errors will remain and some readable characters will be marked as illegible. Users should bear in mind that in all likelihood such instances will never have been looked at by a TCP editor.
         The texts were encoded and linked to page images in accordance with level 4 of the TEI in Libraries guidelines.
         Copies of the texts have been issued variously as SGML (TCP schema; ASCII text with mnemonic sdata character entities); displayable XML (TCP schema; characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or text strings within braces); or lossless XML (TEI P5, characters represented either as UTF-8 Unicode or TEI g elements).
         
          Keying and markup guidelines are available at the
           Text Creation Partnership web site
          .
        
      
       
         
         
      
    
     
       
         eng
      
       
         
           Preaching -- Early works to 1800.
        
      
    
     
        2004-07 TCP
        Assigned for keying and markup
      
        2004-07 Apex CoVantage
        Keyed and coded from ProQuest page images
      
        2004-08 Rachel Losh
        Sampled and proofread
      
        2004-08 Rachel Losh
        Text and markup reviewed and edited
      
        2004-10 pfs
        Batch review (QC) and XML conversion
      
    
  
   
     
       
         
         
         
           THE
           ARTE
           OF
           PROPHECYING
           :
           Or
           A
           TREATISE
           CONCERNING
           the
           sacred
           and
           onely
           true
           manner
           and
           
             methode
             of
             Preaching
          
           .
        
         
           First
           written
           in
           Latine
           by
           Master
           
             William
             Perkins
          
           :
           and
           now
           faithfully
           translated
           into
           English
           (
           for
           that
           it
           containeth
           many
           worthie
           things
           fit
           for
           the
           knowledge
           of
           men
           of
           all
           degrees
           )
           by
           
             Thomas
             Tuke
          
           .
        
         
           
             Nehem.
             8.
             4.
             5.
             6.
             
          
           
             And
             Ezra
             the
             Scribe
             stood
             vpon
          
           
           
             a
             pulpit
             of
             wood
             ,
             which
             hee
             had
             made
             for
             the
             preaching
             .
             And
             Ezra
             opened
             the
             booke
             before
             all
             the
             people
             :
             for
             he
             was
             aboue
             all
             the
             people
             :
             and
             when
             hee
             opened
             it
             ,
             all
             the
             people
             stood
             vp
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             Ezra
             praised
             the
             Lord
             the
             great
          
           
           
             God
             ,
             and
             all
             the
             people
             answered
             ,
             Amen
             ,
             Amen
             ,
          
           —
           vers
           .
           7.
           
           
             In
             like
             manner
             Ieshua
             and
             Bani
          
           
           &c.
           vers
           .
           8.
           
           
             And
             they
             read
             in
             the
             booke
             of
             the
             law
             of
             God
             distinctly
             :
             and
             gaue
             the
             sense
             ,
             and
          
           
           
             caused
             them
             to
             vnderstand
             the
             reading
             .
          
        
         
           Imprinted
           at
           London
           by
           
             Felix
             Kyngston
          
           for
           
             E.
             E.
          
           and
           are
           to
           be
           sold
           in
           Pauls
           Church-yard
           at
           the
           signe
           of
           the
           Swan
           .
           1607.
           
        
      
       
         
         
         
           TO
           THE
           RIGHT
           WORSHIPFVLL
           SIR
           WILLIAM
           ARMIN
           Knight
           .
        
         
           SIR
           ,
           many
           and
           excellent
           benefites
           hath
           the
           Lord
           in
           mercy
           vouchsafed
           to
           vs
           these
           eight
           and
           fortie
           by-past
           yeeres
           together
           :
           of
           which
           this
           is
           not
           the
           least
           ,
           if
           not
           the
           greatest
           ,
           that
           hee
           hath
           dispelled
           the
           duskie
           clowdes
           of
           Popish
           darknesse
           as
           palpable
           as
           that
           of
           Egypt
           ,
           and
           hath
           caused
           the
           Sun-light
           
           of
           the
           Gospell
           to
           shine
           cleerely
           in
           all
           our
           coasts
           .
           Hee
           sheweth
           his
           
           word
           vnto
           vs
           ,
           as
           he
           did
           vnto
           Iaacob
           ,
           
           his
           statutes
           and
           his
           iudgements
           ,
           as
           he
           did
           sometimes
           to
           Israel
           .
           He
           hath
           giuen
           vs
           his
           Prophets
           and
           Embassadours
           ,
           which
           doe
           serue
           like
           that
           cloude
           and
           pillar
           of
           fire
           to
           direct
           vs
           
           in
           our
           pilgrimage
           through
           the
           wildernesse
           of
           this
           wicked
           world
           into
           celestiall
           Canaan
           .
           Hee
           hath
           thrust
           forth
           many
           faithfull
           and
           industrious
           labourers
           into
           his
           Vineyard
           to
           prune
           and
           to
           dresse
           the
           vines
           of
           our
           soules
           ,
           that
           we
           may
           bring
           foorth
           the
           grapes
           of
           pietie
           and
           the
           clusters
           of
           iustice
           ;
           (
           vnlesse
           we
           will
           needs
           be
           like
           to
           the
           Cypresse
           ,
           which
           ,
           as
           Plinie
           saith
           ,
           can
           indure
           no
           husbanding
           ,
           but
           maketh
           that
           her
           maladie
           ,
           which
           is
           a
           medicine
           to
           other
           trees
           )
           Amongst
           whom
           the
           Author
           of
           this
           learned
           Tractate
           did
           shew
           himselfe
           with
           the
           formost
           ;
           carrying
           alwaies
           with
           him
           a
           Light
           of
           learning
           ,
           and
           a
           Lampe
           of
           godly
           
           liuing
           .
           And
           ,
           
             qualis
             vita
             ,
             finis
             ita
          
           ;
           As
           he
           was
           a
           Lampe
           whiles
           he
           liued
           ,
           so
           like
           a
           Lampe
           ,
           
             alijs
             inseruiens
             seipsum
             consumpsit
          
           .
           His
           whole
           life
           was
           labour
           ,
           
             seribenda
             dicens
             &
             legenda
             scribens
          
           .
           One
           whereof
           was
           this
           present
           discourse
           and
           platforme
           concerning
           the
           true
           vnderstanding
           and
           vsing
           of
           the
           Scriptures
           ,
           written
           in
           his
           yonger
           yeeres
           :
           which
           I
           am
           bold
           to
           present
           and
           dedicate
           to
           your
           Worship
           in
           this
           plight
           you
           see
           ;
           partly
           because
           it
           is
           a
           Thesaurus
           and
           store-house
           of
           excellent
           precepts
           ,
           (
           as
           
             Domitius
             Piso
          
           saith
           that
           bookes
           should
           bee
           such
           )
           hauing
           in
           it
           
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
             〈◊〉
          
           ,
           sufficient
           furniture
           to
           further
           perfection
           in
           that
           sacred
           science
           :
           and
           partly
           to
           demonstrate
           my
           gratitude
           ,
           and
           deuoted
           affection
           to
           you
           ,
           who
           haue
           alwaies
           bin
           a
           constant
           patrone
           
             (
             etiam
             minitante
             Fortuna
          
           )
           to
           my
           neerest
           and
           dearest
           friends
           .
        
         
         
           Thus
           I
           take
           my
           humble
           leaue
           ,
           desiring
           your
           kinde
           acceptance
           ,
           and
           so
           commend
           your
           Worship
           with
           your
           whole
           progenie
           to
           the
           protection
           of
           the
           Lord.
           London
           ,
           Ian.
           1.
           1606.
           
        
         
           
             Your
             Worships
             in
             all
             dutie
             Thomas
             Tuke
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           TO
           THE
           FAITHFVLL
           MINISTERS
           OF
           THE
           GOSPELL
           :
           AND
           to
           all
           that
           are
           desirous
           of
           ,
           and
           doe
           
             labour
             for
             the
             knowledge
             of
          
           Holy
           learning
           .
        
         
           THat
           common
           place
           of
           diuinitie
           ,
           which
           concerneth
           the
           framing
           of
           Sermons
           ,
           is
           both
           weightie
           and
           difficult
           ,
           if
           there
           be
           any
           other
           throughout
           all
           that
           sacred
           science
           .
           For
           the
           matter
           ,
           which
           it
           is
           to
           explicate
           and
           treate
           on
           ,
           is
           Prophecie
           ;
           an
           excellent
           gift
           indeede
           ,
           whether
           we
           consider
           it
           in
           respect
           of
           dignitie
           ,
           or
           of
           vse
           .
           The
           dignitie
           thereof
           appeareth
           ,
           in
           that
           like
           a
           Ladie
           
           it
           is
           highly
           mounted
           and
           carried
           a
           loft
           in
           a
           Chariot
           :
           whereas
           all
           other
           gifts
           ,
           both
           of
           tongues
           and
           arts
           ,
           attend
           on
           this
           like
           handmaides
           a
           loofe
           off
           .
           Answerable
           to
           this
           dignitie
           there
           is
           also
           a
           two
           folde
           vse
           :
           one
           ,
           in
           that
           it
           serueth
           to
           collect
           the
           Church
           ,
           and
           to
           accomplish
           the
           number
           of
           the
           Elect
           :
           the
           other
           ,
           for
           that
           it
           driueth
           away
           the
           Woolues
           from
           the
           foldes
           of
           the
           Lord.
           For
           this
           is
           indeede
           that
           Flexanima
           ,
           that
           allurer
           of
           the
           Soule
           ,
           whereby
           mens
           froward
           mindes
           are
           mitigated
           and
           moued
           from
           an
           vngodly
           and
           barbarous
           life
           vnto
           Christian
           faith
           and
           repentance
           .
           This
           also
           is
           that
           Engine
           ,
           which
           as
           it
           hath
           shaken
           (
           the
           foundation
           of
           )
           auncient
           heresies
           ,
           so
           it
           hath
           in
           these
           few
           by-past
           yeares
           ,
           cut
           asunder
           the
           sinews
           of
           that
           great
           Antichrist
           .
           Wherefore
           if
           it
           be
           demaunded
           which
           is
           the
           most
           excellent
           gift
           of
           all
           ,
           doubtlesse
           the
           praise
           must
           be
           giuen
           to
           Prophecying
           .
           Now
           by
           how
           much
           the
           more
           excellent
           euery
           thing
           
           is
           ,
           by
           so
           much
           the
           more
           diligently
           it
           ought
           to
           be
           adorned
           with
           varietie
           and
           plentie
           of
           precepts
           .
           Therefore
           ,
           when
           I
           saw
           this
           common
           place
           so
           handled
           of
           many
           ,
           as
           that
           it
           would
           remaine
           naked
           and
           poore
           ,
           if
           all
           other
           arts
           should
           call
           for
           those
           things
           ,
           which
           are
           their
           owne
           :
           I
           perused
           the
           writings
           of
           Diuines
           ,
           and
           hauing
           gathered
           some
           rules
           out
           of
           them
           ,
           I
           haue
           couched
           them
           in
           that
           methode
           ,
           which
           I
           haue
           deemed
           most
           commodious
           :
           that
           they
           might
           be
           better
           for
           vse
           ,
           and
           fitter
           for
           the
           memorie
           .
           I
           doe
           also
           publish
           them
           ,
           that
           they
           might
           be
           approoued
           ,
           if
           they
           bring
           with
           them
           that
           which
           is
           good
           :
           if
           any
           euill
           ,
           that
           they
           may
           receiue
           their
           deserued
           punishment
           .
           And
           whosoeuer
           thou
           art
           that
           pleasest
           to
           reade
           them
           ,
           where
           thou
           art
           perswaded
           of
           this
           order
           of
           Preaching
           ,
           which
           here
           I
           handle
           ,
           walke
           on
           with
           me
           :
           where
           thou
           standest
           at
           a
           stay
           ,
           inquire
           with
           me
           :
           *
           where
           thou
           perceiuest
           thine
           owne
           errors
           ,
           returne
           to
           me
           :
           where
           thou
           
           seest
           mine
           ,
           call
           me
           back
           to
           thee
           .
           For
           that
           ,
           which
           now
           liketh
           me
           ,
           shall
           dislike
           me
           ,
           if
           it
           like
           not
           gadlie
           and
           moderate
           minded
           men
           .
           But
           if
           any
           man
           shall
           carpe
           at
           this
           my
           trauaile
           ,
           though
           very
           small
           ,
           let
           him
           know
           ,
           that
           my
           onely
           meaning
           is
           to
           benefite
           the
           Church
           of
           God
           :
           and
           that
           the
           conscience
           of
           my
           fact
           is
           a
           sufficient
           mu●●ment
           against
           all
           calumnies
           .
           I
           doe
           now
           betake
           you
           to
           God
           ,
           and
           this
           (
           tractate
           of
           the
           )
           art
           of
           Prophecying
           ,
           both
           to
           you
           and
           to
           God.
           
             Anno
             1592.
             
             Decemb.
          
           12.
           
        
         
           
             WILLIAM
             PERKINS
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
         
           The
           Analysis
           of
           the
           whole
           booke
           .
        
         
           
             The
             Arte
             of
             Prophecying
             .
             The
             parts
             thereof
             are
             two
             ,
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     
                       Preaching
                       :
                       in
                       which
                       consider
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         
                           
                             1.
                             
                             
                               The
                               obiect
                               ,
                               which
                               is
                               the
                               word
                               of
                               God
                               :
                               in
                               it
                               note
                               ,
                            
                          
                           
                             
                               
                                 1.
                                 
                                 
                                   The
                                   excellencie
                                   thereof
                                
                                 .
                              
                               
                                 
                                   
                                     2.
                                     
                                     
                                       The
                                       parts
                                       ,
                                       which
                                       are
                                       the
                                       two
                                       Testaments
                                       ,
                                    
                                  
                                   
                                     
                                       
                                         
                                           
                                             1.
                                             
                                             
                                               The
                                               Old
                                               ,
                                               whose
                                               bookes
                                               are
                                               ,
                                            
                                          
                                           
                                             
                                               
                                                 Historicall
                                                 .
                                              
                                               
                                                 Dogmaticall
                                                 .
                                              
                                               
                                                 Propheticall
                                                 .
                                              
                                            
                                          
                                        
                                      
                                       
                                         2.
                                         
                                         
                                           The
                                           New.
                                        
                                         
                                      
                                    
                                  
                                
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                       
                         
                           
                             2.
                             
                             
                               The
                               parts
                               ,
                               which
                               are
                            
                          
                           
                             
                               
                                 
                                   
                                     1.
                                     
                                     
                                       The
                                       preparatiō
                                       or
                                       prouision
                                       of
                                       the
                                       Sermon
                                       ,
                                       cōsisting
                                       of
                                    
                                  
                                   
                                     
                                       
                                         
                                           
                                             Interpretation
                                             of
                                             the
                                             Text
                                          
                                           
                                             
                                               
                                                 
                                                   Analogicall
                                                   and
                                                   plaine
                                                   .
                                                   or
                                                
                                                 ,
                                              
                                               
                                                 
                                                   Crypticall
                                                   and
                                                   darke
                                                
                                                 .
                                              
                                            
                                          
                                        
                                      
                                       
                                         
                                           
                                             The
                                             cutting
                                             or
                                             diuiding
                                             of
                                             it
                                             aright
                                             ,
                                             consisting
                                             of
                                          
                                           
                                             
                                               
                                                 
                                                   The
                                                   resoluing
                                                   or
                                                   vntwisting
                                                   of
                                                   it
                                                   .
                                                
                                              
                                               
                                                 
                                                   
                                                     The
                                                     applying
                                                     of
                                                     it
                                                  
                                                   
                                                     
                                                       
                                                         7.
                                                         
                                                         
                                                           Waies
                                                           of
                                                           applying
                                                           it
                                                        
                                                         .
                                                      
                                                       
                                                         
                                                           
                                                             The
                                                             parts
                                                             ,
                                                             which
                                                             concerne
                                                          
                                                           
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             The
                                                             vnderstanding
                                                             by
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             Doctrine
                                                             .
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             Redargution
                                                             ,
                                                             or
                                                             improouing
                                                            
                                                             .
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             The
                                                             Practise
                                                             by
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             Instructing
                                                             .
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             Correcting
                                                             .
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                          
                                                        
                                                      
                                                    
                                                  
                                                
                                              
                                            
                                          
                                        
                                      
                                    
                                  
                                
                              
                               
                                 
                                   
                                     2.
                                     
                                     
                                       The
                                       vttering
                                       of
                                       the
                                       Sermon
                                    
                                  
                                   
                                     
                                       
                                         
                                           The
                                           hiding
                                           of
                                           humane
                                           wisdome
                                        
                                         .
                                      
                                       
                                         
                                           
                                             The
                                             demōstration
                                             of
                                             the
                                             spirit
                                             ,
                                             in
                                          
                                           
                                             
                                               
                                                 
                                                   
                                                     The
                                                     speech
                                                     ,
                                                     which
                                                     must
                                                     be
                                                  
                                                   
                                                     
                                                       
                                                         Spirituall
                                                         .
                                                      
                                                       
                                                         
                                                           
                                                             Gracious
                                                             :
                                                             grace
                                                             is
                                                             of
                                                             ,
                                                          
                                                           
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             1.
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             The
                                                             person
                                                             ,
                                                             to
                                                             wit
                                                             ,
                                                             holinesse
                                                             ,
                                                            
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             1.
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             An
                                                             inward
                                                             feeling
                                                            
                                                             .
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             2.
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             A
                                                             good
                                                             conscience
                                                            
                                                             .
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             3.
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             The
                                                             feare
                                                             of
                                                             God.
                                                            
                                                             
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             4.
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             A
                                                             loue
                                                             of
                                                             the
                                                             people
                                                            
                                                             .
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             2.
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             Of
                                                             the
                                                             Ministerie
                                                            
                                                             ,
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             
                                                             Authoritie
                                                             .
                                                            
                                                             
                                                             Zeale
                                                             .
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                            
                                                          
                                                        
                                                      
                                                    
                                                  
                                                
                                              
                                               
                                                 
                                                   
                                                     The
                                                     gesture
                                                     and
                                                     action
                                                     of
                                                  
                                                   
                                                     
                                                       
                                                         
                                                           The
                                                           voyce
                                                        
                                                         .
                                                      
                                                       
                                                         
                                                           The
                                                           bodie
                                                        
                                                         .
                                                      
                                                    
                                                  
                                                
                                              
                                            
                                          
                                        
                                      
                                    
                                  
                                
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     2.
                     
                     
                       Conceiuing
                       of
                       publique
                       Prayer
                       :
                       in
                       which
                       note
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         
                           The
                           matter
                        
                         .
                      
                       
                         2.
                         
                         
                           The
                           forme
                        
                         .
                      
                       
                         
                           
                             3.
                             
                             
                               The
                               parts
                            
                             ,
                          
                           
                             
                               
                                 Meditation
                                 .
                              
                               
                                 Ordering
                                 .
                              
                               
                                 Vttering
                                 .
                              
                            
                          
                        
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
          
        
      
    
     
       
         
         
         
         
           THE
           ARTE
           OF
           PROPHECYING
           .
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             1.
             
          
           
             THe
             Arte
             or
             facultie
             of
             Prophecying
             is
             a
             sacred
             doctrine
             of
             exercising
             Prophecie
             rightly
             .
          
           
             Prophecie
             (
             or
             Prophecying
             )
             is
             a
             publique
             and
             solemne
             speech
             of
             the
             Prophet
             ,
             pertaining
             to
             the
             worship
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             to
             the
             saluation
             of
             our
             neighbour
             .
             1.
             
             Cor.
             14.
             3.
             
             
               But
               he
               that
               prophecieth
               speaketh
               vnto
               men
               to
               edification
               ,
               to
               exhortation
               and
               to
               consolation
               .
            
             Verse
             24.
             
             
               But
               if
               all
               prophecie
               ,
               and
               there
               come
               in
               one
               that
               beleeueth
               not
               ,
               or
               one
               
               vnlearned
               ,
               he
               is
               rebuked
               of
               all
               men
               ,
               and
               is
            
             *
             
               iudged
               of
               all
               men
            
             ,
             Rom.
             1.
             9.
             
             
               God
               is
               my
               witnes
               ,
               whom
               I
               serue
               (
               or
               worship
            
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               in
               my
               spirit
               in
               the
               Gospell
               of
               his
               Sonne
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             II.
             
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               Preaching
               of
               the
               Word
               .
            
          
           
             THere
             are
             two
             parts
             of
             Prophecie
             :
             Preaching
             of
             the
             Word
             ,
             and
             Conceiuing
             of
             Prayers
             .
          
           
             For
             in
             speaking
             there
             are
             onely
             two
             duties
             of
             the
             Prophet
             ,
             that
             is
             of
             the
             Minister
             of
             the
             word
             ;
             to
             wit
             ,
             Preaching
             of
             the
             word
             ,
             and
             Praying
             vnto
             God
             in
             the
             name
             of
             the
             people
             .
             Rom.
             12.
             
             
               Hauing
               prophecie
               ,
               let
               vs
               prophecie
               according
               to
               the
            
             *
             
               proportion
               of
               faith
            
             .
             Gen.
             20.
             7.
             
             
               Deliuer
               the
               man
               his
               wife
               againe
               ,
               for
               he
               is
               a
               Prophet
               :
               and
               when
               he
               shall
               pray
               for
               thee
               ,
               thou
               shalt
               liue
               .
            
             For
             this
             cause
             the
             word
             
               (
               Prophecie
            
             )
             is
             giuen
             also
             to
             prayers
             .
             1.
             
             Chron.
             25.
             1.
             
             
               The
               sonnes
               of
               Asaph
               ,
               
               and
               Heman
               and
               Ieduthun
               ,
               who
               were
               singers
               ,
               prophecied
               with
               Harpes
               ,
               with
               Uials
               ,
               and
               with
               cymbals
               .
            
             1.
             
             King.
             18.
             26.
             
             
               The
               Prophets
               of
               Baal
               called
               vpon
               the
               name
               of
               Baal
               from
               morning
               to
               noone
               .
               29.
               
               And
               when
               mid-day
               was
               passed
               ,
               and
               they
               had
               prophecied
               vntill
               the
               offering
               of
               the
               euening
               sacrifice
               .
            
          
           
             And
             euery
             Prophet
             is
             partly
             the
             voyce
             of
             God
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             in
             preaching
             :
             and
             partlie
             the
             voyce
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             in
             the
             acte
             of
             praying
             ,
             Ier.
             15.
             19.
             
             
               If
               thou
               take
               away
               the
               precious
               frō
               the
               vile
               ,
               thou
               shalt
               be
               as
               it
               were
               My
               Mouth
               .
            
             Nehe.
             8.
             6.
             
             
               And
               Hezra
               blessed
               the
               Lord
               the
               great
               God
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               people
               answered
               Amen
               .
            
          
           
             Preaching
             of
             the
             word
             is
             Prophecying
             in
             the
             name
             and
             roome
             of
             Christ
             ,
             whereby
             men
             are
             called
             to
             the
             state
             of
             Grace
             ,
             and
             conserued
             in
             it
             .
             2.
             
             Cor.
             5.
             19.
             
             
               And
               hath
               committed
               to
               vs
               the
               word
               of
               reconciliation
               .
               20.
               
               Therefore
               wee
               are
               Embassadours
               for
               Christ
               :
               as
               though
               God
               did
               beseech
               you
               by
               vs
               ,
               we
               pray
               you
               in
               the
               name
               of
               Christ
               ,
               that
               ye
               be
               reconciled
               to
               God.
            
             2.
             
             Thes.
             2.
             13.
             14.
             
             
               God
               hath
               from
               the
               beginning
               elected
               you
               to
               saluation
               ,
               through
               sanstification
               of
               the
               Spirit
               ,
               and
               faith
               embracing
               the
               trueth
               :
               whereunto
               
               he
               called
               you
               by
               our
               Gospell
               .
            
             Rom.
             1.
             16.
             
             
               The
               Gospel
               is
               the
               power
               of
               God
               to
               saluation
               to
               euery
               one
               that
               beleeueth
               .
            
             Prou.
             29.
             18.
             
             
               When
               there
               is
               no
               vision
               the
               people
               are
               naked
               .
            
             Rom.
             10.
             14.
             
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             III.
             
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               Word
               of
               God.
               
            
          
           
             THe
             perfect
             and
             equall
             *
             obiect
             of
             Preaching
             is
             the
             Word
             of
             God.
             Lok
             .
             16.
             29.
             
             
               They
               haue
               Moses
               and
               the
               Prophets
               ,
               let
               them
               heare
               them
               .
            
             Mat.
             23.
             2.
             
             
               The
               Scribes
               and
               Pharises
               sit
               in
               Moses
               chaire
               ,
            
             that
             is
             ,
             they
             teach
             the
             doctrine
             of
             Moses
             which
             they
             doe
             professe
             .
             3.
             
             
               All
               therefore
               whatsoeuer
               they
               bid
               you
               obserue
               ,
               that
               obserue
               and
               doe
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Word
             of
             God
             is
             the
             wisedome
             of
             God
             concerning
             the
             trueth
             ,
             which
             is
             according
             vnto
             godlinesse
             descending
             from
             aboue
             .
             Iam.
             3.
             17.
             
             
               But
               the
               wisedome
               ,
               which
               
               is
               from
            
             *
             
               aboue
               is
               first
               pure
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             Tit.
             1.
             1.
             
             
               Paul
               a
               Seruant
               of
               God
               —
               according
               to
               the
               acknowledging
               of
               the
               trueth
               ,
               which
               is
               according
               vnto
               godlines
               .
            
          
           
             Admirable
             is
             the
             excellencie
             of
             the
             Word
             ,
             which
             is
             euident
             partly
             by
             the
             nature
             thereof
             ,
             partly
             by
             the
             operation
             .
          
           
             The
             excellencie
             of
             the
             nature
             is
             either
             the
             perfection
             thereof
             ,
             or
             the
             eternitie
             .
          
           
             The
             perfection
             is
             either
             the
             sufficiencie
             or
             the
             puritie
             .
             The
             sufficiencie
             is
             that
             ,
             whereby
             the
             word
             of
             God
             is
             so
             compleat
             ,
             that
             nothing
             may
             be
             either
             put
             to
             it
             ,
             or
             taken
             from
             it
             ,
             which
             appertaineth
             to
             the
             proper
             end
             thereof
             .
             Psal.
             19.
             7.
             
             
               The
               Law
               of
               the
               Lord
               is
               perfect
               ,
               conuerting
               the
               soule
               .
            
             Deut.
             12.
             32.
             
             
               Whatsoeuer
               I
               commaund
               you
               ,
               take
               heede
               yee
               doe
               it
               :
               thou
               shalt
               put
               nothing
               thereto
               ,
               nor
               take
               ought
               therefrom
               .
            
             Reuel
             .
             22.
             18.
             19.
             
          
           
             The
             puritie
             thereof
             is
             ,
             whereby
             it
             remaineth
             entire
             in
             it selfe
             ,
             voide
             of
             deceit
             and
             errour
             ,
             Psalm
             .
             12.
             6.
             
             
               The
               words
               of
               the
               Lord
               are
               pure
               words
               ,
               as
               siluer
               tried
               in
               a
               furnace
               of
               earth
               fined
               seuen
               times
               .
            
          
           
             The
             eternity
             of
             the
             word
             is
             that
             ,
             whereby
             
             it
             abideth
             inuiolable
             ,
             and
             cannot
             passe
             vntill
             all
             that
             ,
             which
             it
             commandeth
             ,
             bee
             fully
             accomplished
             ,
             Matth.
             5.
             18.
             
          
           
             The
             excellencie
             of
             operation
             is
             that
             ,
             wherby
             it
             is
             endowed
             with
             virtue
             ;
             first
             to
             discerne
             the
             spirit
             of
             man
             ,
             Heb.
             4.
             12.
             
             
               For
               the
               word
               of
               God
               is
               liuely
               ,
               and
               mightie
               in
               operation
               ,
               and
               sharper
               then
               any
               two-edged
               sword
               ,
               and
               entreth
               through
               euen
               to
               the
               deuiding
               asunder
               of
               the
               soule
               and
               spirit
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               ioynts
               and
               the
               marrow
               ,
               aad
               discerneth
               the
               thoughts
               and
               intents
               of
               the
               heart
               .
            
             Secondly
             ,
             to
             bind
             the
             conscience
             .
             Iam.
             4.
             12.
             
             
               There
               is
               one
               Law-giuer
               ,
               who
               is
               able
               to
               saue
               and
               to
               destroy
               .
            
             Esa.
             33.
             21.
             
             
               The
               Lord
               is
               our
               Iudge
               ,
               the
               Lord
               is
               our
               Law-giuer
               ,
               the
               Lord
               is
               our
               King
               ,
               he
               will
               saue
               vs.
            
             To
             bind
             the
             conscience
             is
             to
             constraine
             it
             either
             to
             accuse
             vs
             or
             to
             excuse
             vs
             of
             sinne
             before
             God.
             
          
           
             The
             Word
             is
             in
             the
             holy
             Scripture
             .
          
           
             The
             Scripture
             is
             the
             word
             of
             God
             written
             in
             a
             language
             fit
             for
             the
             Church
             by
             men
             immediately
             called
             to
             be
             the
             Clerks
             or
             Secretaries
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             .
             2.
             
             Pet.
             1.
             21.
             
             
               For
               prophecie
               came
               not
               in
               old
               time
               by
               the
               will
               of
               man
               ,
               but
               the
               holy
               men
               of
               God
               
               spake
               as
               they
               were
               carried
               and
               mooued
               by
               the
            
             
             
               holy
               Ghost
            
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             called
             Canonicall
             ,
             because
             it
             is
             as
             it
             were
             a
             Canon
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             a
             Rule
             or
             Line
             of
             the
             Master
             workman
             ,
             by
             the
             helpe
             whereof
             the
             truth
             is
             both
             first
             to
             be
             found
             out
             ,
             and
             also
             afterwards
             to
             be
             examined
             .
             Gal.
             6.
             16.
             
             
               And
               as
               many
               as
               walke
               according
               to
               this
            
             *
             
               Canon
               or
               Rule
            
             .
             Therefore
             the
             supreame
             and
             absolute
             determination
             and
             iudgement
             of
             the
             controuersies
             of
             the
             Church
             ought
             to
             be
             giuen
             vnto
             it
             .
          
           
             The
             Summe
             of
             the
             Scripture
             is
             conteined
             in
             such
             a
             syllogisme
             (
             or
             forme
             of
             reasoning
             ,
             as
             this
             is
             which
             followeth
             .
             )
             *
             
               The
               true
               Messias
               shall
               be
               both
               God
               and
               Man
               of
               the
               seede
               of
               Dauid
               ;
               he
               shall
               be
               borne
               of
               a
               Uirgin
               ;
               he
               shall
               bring
               the
               Gospell
               forth
               of
               his
               Fathers
               bosome
               ;
               he
               shall
               satisfie
               the
               Law
               ;
               he
               shall
               offer
               vp
               himselfe
               a
               sacrifice
               for
               the
               sinnes
               of
               the
               faithfull
               ;
               he
               shall
               conquer
               death
               by
               dying
               and
               rising
               againe
               ;
               he
               shall
               ascend
               into
               heauen
               ;
               and
               in
               his
               due
               time
               hee
               shall
               returne
               vnto
               iudgement
               .
               But
            
             *
             
               Iesus
               of
               Nazaret
               the
               Sonne
               of
               Mary
               is
               such
               a
               one
               ;
               He
            
             *
             
               therefore
               is
               the
               true
               Messias
            
             .
          
           
             In
             this
             syllogisme
             the
             Maior
             is
             the
             scope
             
             or
             principall
             drift
             in
             all
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Prophets
             :
             and
             the
             Minor
             in
             the
             writings
             of
             the
             Euangelists
             and
             Apostles
             .
          
           
             The
             Scripture
             is
             either
             the
             New
             Testament
             or
             the
             Old.
             
          
           
             The
             old
             testament
             is
             y
             ●
             first
             part
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             written
             by
             the
             Prophets
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             tongue
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             in
             the
             Chaldie
             ,
             vnfolding
             chiefely
             that
             old
             couenant
             of
             works
             .
             Luk.
             16.
             29.
             and
             24.
             27.
             
             
               And
               he
               began
               at
               Moses
               ,
               and
               at
               all
               the
               Prophets
               ,
               and
               interpreted
               vnto
               them
               in
               all
               the
               Scriptures
               the
               things
               which
               were
               written
               of
               him
               .
            
          
           
             It
             is
             distinguished
             by
             bookes
             ,
             which
             are
             either
             Historicall
             ,
             or
             Dogmaticall
             ,
             or
             Propheticall
             .
          
           
             The
             Historicall
             bookes
             are
             stories
             of
             things
             done
             ,
             for
             the
             illustration
             and
             confirmation
             of
             that
             doctrine
             which
             is
             propounded
             in
             other
             bookes
             .
             1.
             
             Cor.
             10.
             11.
             
             
               Now
               al
               these
               things
               came
               vpo
               them
               for
            
             *
             
               ensamples
               :
               and
               were
               written
               to
               admonish
               vs.
            
             Rom.
             15.
             4.
             
             
               For
               whatsoeuer
               things
               were
               written
               afore-time
               ,
               are
               written
               for
               our
               learning
               .
            
          
           
             These
             books
             are
             in
             number
             fifteene
             .
          
           
             1
             Genesis
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             historie
             of
             the
             creation
             ,
             fall
             ,
             promise
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             state
             of
             
             the
             Church
             conserued
             (
             and
             shut
             vp
             )
             in
             priuate
             families
             .
          
           
             2
             Exodus
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             historie
             of
             the
             deliuerance
             of
             the
             Israelites
             from
             the
             Aegyptians
             ,
             of
             their
             going
             out
             of
             Aegypt
             ,
             of
             the
             promulgation
             of
             the
             Law
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             Tabernacle
             .
          
           
             3
             Leuiticus
             ,
             which
             containeth
             a
             storie
             of
             the
             Ceremoniall
             worship
             .
          
           
             4
             Numbers
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             historie
             of
             their
             martiall
             marching
             into
             the
             land
             of
             Canaan
             .
          
           
             5
             Deuteronomie
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             commentarie
             repeating
             and
             explicating
             the
             Lawes
             out
             of
             the
             fore-said
             bookes
             .
          
           
             6
             The
             booke
             of
             Ioshua
             ,
             which
             declareth
             their
             entrance
             into
             ,
             and
             possession
             of
             the
             land
             of
             Canaan
             vnder
             Ioshua
             .
          
           
             7
             The
             book
             of
             the
             Iudges
             ,
             which
             comprehendeth
             an
             historie
             of
             the
             corrupt
             and
             miserable
             condition
             of
             the
             Church
             and
             Common-wealth
             of
             Israel
             from
             Ioshua
             to
             Eli.
             
          
           
             8
             The
             booke
             of
             Ruth
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             historie
             concerning
             the
             mariages
             and
             posteritie
             of
             Ruth
             .
          
           
             9
             The
             first
             and
             second
             booke
             of
             Samuel
             ,
             
             which
             is
             a
             storie
             of
             things
             done
             vnder
             Eli
             and
             Samuel
             Priests
             ,
             and
             vnder
             Saul
             and
             Dauid
             Kings
             .
          
           
             10
             The
             first
             and
             second
             booke
             of
             Kings
             ,
             which
             maketh
             a
             narratiō
             of
             things
             atchieued
             in
             the
             daies
             of
             the
             Kings
             of
             Israel
             and
             Iudah
             .
          
           
             11
             The
             first
             and
             second
             booke
             of
             Chronicles
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             methodicall
             historie
             of
             the
             beginning
             ,
             increase
             ,
             and
             ruine
             of
             the
             people
             of
             Israel
             ,
             seruing
             to
             explaine
             and
             shew
             the
             Line
             or
             Linage
             of
             Christ.
             
          
           
             12
             The
             booke
             of
             Ezra
             ,
             which
             containeth
             an
             historie
             of
             their
             returne
             from
             captiuitie
             in
             Babylon
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             Restoring
             of
             the
             citie
             .
          
           
             13
             The
             booke
             of
             Nehemiah
             ,
             which
             speaketh
             of
             the
             restoring
             of
             the
             city
             which
             was
             to
             be
             finished
             .
          
           
             14
             The
             booke
             of
             Hester
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             historie
             of
             the
             preseruation
             of
             the
             Church
             of
             the
             Iewes
             in
             Persia
             by
             Hester
             .
          
           
             15
             The
             booke
             of
             Iob
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             history
             intreating
             of
             the
             causes
             of
             tentations
             ,
             as
             also
             of
             his
             manifold
             conflicts
             ,
             and
             lastly
             of
             his
             happie
             issue
             .
          
           
             The
             Dogmaticall
             bookes
             are
             those
             ,
             
             which
             teach
             and
             prescribe
             the
             Doctrine
             of
             Diuinitie
             .
          
           
             These
             are
             foure
             in
             number
             .
          
           
             1
             The
             booke
             of
             Psalmes
             ,
             which
             containeth
             sacred
             songes
             to
             be
             fitted
             for
             euerie
             condition
             both
             of
             the
             Church
             and
             the
             particular
             members
             therof
             ,
             and
             also
             to
             be
             sung
             with
             grace
             in
             the
             heart
             ,
             Col.
             3.
             16.
             
          
           
             2
             The
             booke
             of
             Prouerbes
             ,
             which
             is
             a
             treatise
             of
             Christian
             manners
             ,
             teaching
             pietie
             towards
             God
             ,
             and
             iustice
             towards
             our
             Neighbour
             .
          
           
             3
             The
             *
             booke
             of
             the
             Preacher
             ,
             which
             discloseth
             the
             vanity
             of
             al
             humane
             things
             ,
             so
             farre
             forth
             as
             they
             are
             vsed
             without
             the
             feare
             of
             God.
             
          
           
             4.
             
             The
             *
             
               Song
               of
               Songs
            
             ,
             which
             speaketh
             of
             the
             mutuall
             communion
             of
             Christ
             with
             the
             Church
             ,
             vnder
             an
             allegorie
             of
             a
             *
             Bridegroome
             and
             his
             Bride
             .
          
           
             The
             Prophetical
             books
             are
             Predictions
             ,
             either
             of
             the
             iudgements
             of
             God
             for
             the
             sinnes
             of
             the
             people
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             deliuerance
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             which
             is
             to
             bee
             perfited
             at
             the
             comming
             of
             Christ.
             
          
           
             But
             with
             these
             predictions
             *
             they
             doe
             mingle
             the
             doctrine
             of
             repentance
             ,
             and
             
             doe
             almost
             alwaies
             vse
             consolations
             in
             Christ
             to
             them
             that
             doe
             repent
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             their
             custome
             also
             for
             the
             helping
             of
             their
             hearers
             memorie
             and
             vnderstanding
             to
             propound
             their
             sermons
             brieflie
             ,
             which
             they
             made
             at
             large
             .
             Esa.
             8.
             1.
             
             
               Moreouer
               the
               Lord
               said
               vnto
               me
               ,
               take
               thee
               a
               great
               roule
               ,
               and
               write
               in
               it
               with
               a
               mans
               penne
               .
            
             Hab.
             2.
             2.
             
             
               Write
               the
               vision
               ,
               and
               make
               it
               plaine
               vpon
               tables
               ,
               that
               he
               may
               run
               that
               readeth
               it
               .
            
          
           
             Prophecies
             are
             either
             greater
             or
             lesser
             .
          
           
             Greater
             are
             such
             as
             do
             more
             plentifullie
             deliuer
             all
             those
             things
             that
             are
             foretold
             ;
             as
             the
             prophecie
             of
             
               Esay
               ,
               Ieremie
               ,
               Ezekiel
               ,
               Daniel
               .
            
          
           
             Hitherto
             belong
             the
             
               Lamentations
               of
               Ieremie
            
             ,
             touching
             the
             miserie
             of
             the
             people
             of
             the
             Iewes
             about
             the
             time
             of
             the
             death
             of
             Iosiah
             .
          
           
             Lesser
             prophecies
             are
             those
             ,
             which
             intreate
             more
             sparinglie
             or
             briefely
             of
             all
             those
             things
             that
             are
             foretold
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             of
             some
             of
             them
             ;
             as
             the
             prophecie
             of
             
               Hosea
               ,
               Ioel
               ,
               Amos
               ,
               Obediah
               ,
               Ionas
               ,
               Michah
               ,
               Nahum
               ,
               Habakuk
               ,
               Zephanie
               ,
               Hagge
               ,
               Zacharie
               ,
               Malachie
               .
            
          
           
             Thus
             much
             for
             the
             Old
             testament
             .
          
           
           
             The
             New
             Testament
             is
             the
             second
             part
             of
             the
             Scripture
             written
             in
             the
             Greeke
             tongue
             by
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             or
             at
             least
             approued
             of
             them
             ,
             propounding
             plainely
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             new
             couenant
             .
             Eph.
             2.
             20.
             
             
               And
               are
               built
               vpon
               the
               foundation
               of
               the
               Prophets
               and
               Apostles
               .
            
          
           
             Peter
             approued
             the
             Gospel
             of
             Marke
             ,
             at
             whose
             motion
             and
             appointment
             it
             was
             written
             by
             Marke
             ,
             as
             it
             pleaseth
             Nicephorus
             to
             auerre
             ,
             
               Lib.
               2.
               cap.
            
             45.
             
             And
             Iohn
             ,
             that
             wrote
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             approued
             the
             Gospell
             of
             Luke
             .
             It
             is
             of
             small
             moment
             ,
             which
             is
             reported
             by
             Eusebius
             ;
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             apparent
             by
             two
             places
             (
             2.
             
             Tim.
             2.
             8.
             and
             Rom.
             2.
             16.
             
             )
             that
             Paul
             was
             the
             author
             of
             that
             Gospell
             ,
             which
             is
             called
             Lukes
             .
             For
             Paul
             doth
             not
             here
             speake
             of
             any
             one
             booke
             ,
             but
             of
             his
             whole
             ministerie
             :
             for
             hee
             addeth
             ,
             
               In
               *
               which
               I
               suffer
               trouble
               as
               an
               euill
               doer
               euen
               vnto
               bonds
               ,
            
             2.
             
             Tim.
             2.
             9.
             
             
          
           
             The
             new
             Testament
             containeth
             partly
             Histories
             ,
             and
             partly
             Epistles
             .
             The
             Histories
             are
             :
          
           
             1
             The
             foure
             Gospels
             of
             Matthew
             ,
             Marke
             ,
             Luke
             ,
             and
             Iohn
             :
             which
             are
             an
             history
             
             of
             the
             life
             ,
             deedes
             ,
             and
             doctrine
             of
             Christ
             exhibited
             vnto
             the
             world
             ,
             continuing
             from
             his
             conception
             euen
             vntill
             his
             ascension
             into
             heauen
             .
          
           
             And
             there
             are
             foure
             writers
             :
             two
             that
             were
             hearers
             ,
             and
             two
             that
             were
             eye-witnesses
             ,
             that
             they
             might
             giue
             greater
             assurance
             of
             the
             truth
             of
             the
             historie
             .
          
           
             The
             difference
             betwixt
             the
             Euangelists
             is
             on
             this
             wise
             :
             Matthew
             layeth
             open
             the
             doctrines
             which
             Christ
             deliuered
             .
             Marke
             sets
             downe
             the
             historie
             briefly
             :
             yet
             did
             he
             not
             make
             an
             abridgement
             of
             the
             Gospell
             which
             Matthew
             wrote
             ,
             as
             Hierome
             supposed
             .
             For
             hee
             begins
             his
             discourse
             in
             a
             diuers
             manner
             ,
             and
             proceedes
             in
             another
             order
             ,
             partly
             intreating
             of
             things
             more
             largely
             ,
             and
             partlie
             interlacing
             of
             new
             matters
             .
             Luke
             aimeth
             at
             or
             frameth
             a
             perfect
             historie
             ,
             and
             described
             in
             a
             certaine
             order
             .
             Iohn
             is
             almost
             wholy
             taken
             vp
             in
             laying
             open
             the
             Godhead
             and
             benefit
             of
             Christ
             ,
             which
             is
             deriued
             from
             his
             Godhead
             vnto
             vs.
             
          
           
             Hierome
             distinguisheth
             the
             Euangelists
             by
             their
             beginnings
             or
             entrance
             .
             He
             saith
             Matthew
             is
             like
             a
             man
             ,
             because
             hee
             
             begins
             with
             the
             Man-hood
             of
             Christ.
             He
             likens
             Marke
             to
             a
             Lion
             ,
             because
             hee
             begins
             with
             the
             preaching
             of
             Iohn
             ,
             which
             was
             like
             the
             roaring
             of
             a
             Lion.
             He
             compares
             Luke
             to
             an
             Oxe
             ,
             because
             he
             beginneth
             with
             Zacharie
             the
             Priest
             offering
             his
             sacrifice
             .
             He
             compareth
             Iohn
             to
             an
             Eagle
             ,
             because
             he
             doth
             (
             as
             it
             were
             )
             so
             are
             vp
             aloft
             and
             begin
             with
             the
             Godhead
             of
             Christ.
             
          
           
             2
             
               The
               Acts
               of
               the
               Apostles
            
             ,
             which
             is
             an
             orderly
             historie
             ,
             specially
             relating
             the
             deeds
             of
             Peter
             and
             Paul
             :
             that
             there
             might
             be
             an
             ensample
             of
             gouerning
             the
             Church
             extant
             .
             2.
             
             Tim.
             3.
             10.
             11.
             
          
           
             3
             The
             Reuelation
             which
             is
             a
             propheticall
             historie
             concerning
             the
             condition
             of
             the
             Church
             from
             the
             age
             in
             which
             Iohn
             the
             Apostle
             liued
             vnto
             the
             ende
             of
             the
             world
             .
          
           
             The
             Epistles
             follow
             .
             1.
             thirteene
             Epistles
             of
             Paul.
             
          
           
             
               1
               To
               the
               Romanes
               ,
               of
               iustification
               ,
               sanctification
               ,
               and
               the
               dueties
               of
               Christian
               life
               .
            
             
               2
               The
               first
               to
               the
               Corinthes
               ,
               concerning
               the
               reforming
               of
               the
               abuses
               of
               the
               Church
               of
               Corinth
               .
            
             
               
               3
               The
               second
               to
               the
               Corinthes
               ,
               containing
               chieflie
               the
               defence
               of
               himselfe
               and
               of
               his
               Apostleship
               against
               his
               aduersaries
               .
            
             
               4
               To
               the
               Galatians
               about
               iustification
               by
               faith
               without
               the
               workes
               of
               the
               Law.
               
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         5
                         To
                         the
                         Colossians
                         ,
                      
                       
                         6
                         To
                         the
                         Philippians
                      
                       
                         7
                         To
                         the
                         Ephesians
                      
                       
                         8
                         The
                         1.
                         to
                         the
                         Thes.
                         
                      
                       
                         9
                         The
                         2.
                         to
                         the
                         Thes.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     Which
                     cōfirme
                     the
                     Churches
                     in
                     doctrine
                     ,
                     and
                     in
                     the
                     dueties
                     of
                     Christian
                     life
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         10
                         The
                         1.
                         to
                         Timothie
                         :
                      
                       
                         11
                         The
                         2.
                         to
                         Timothie
                         :
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     Which
                     prescribe
                     the
                     forme
                     of
                     ordering
                     the
                     Church
                     aright
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               12
               The
               Epistle
               to
               Titus
               ,
               of
               ordering
               the
               Church
               of
               the
               Cretians
               .
            
             
               13.
               
               To
               Philemon
               ,
               of
               receiuing
               Onesimus
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Epistle
             to
             the
             Hebrewes
             ,
             concerning
             the
             person
             and
             offices
             of
             Christ
             ,
             and
             of
             faith
             bringing
             foorth
             fruit
             in
             good
             workes
             .
          
           
             The
             Epistle
             of
             Iames
             ,
             concerning
             works
             to
             be
             ioyned
             with
             faith
             .
          
           
             The
             first
             and
             second
             Epistle
             of
             Peter
             ,
             touching
             sanctification
             and
             the
             works
             of
             new
             obedience
             .
          
           
           
             The
             first
             Epistle
             of
             Iohn
             ,
             concerning
             the
             signes
             of
             fellowship
             with
             God.
             
          
           
             The
             second
             Epistle
             of
             Iohn
             to
             the
             elect
             Ladie
             ,
             about
             perseuerance
             in
             the
             truth
             .
          
           
             The
             third
             Epistle
             of
             Iohn
             to
             Gayus
             ,
             concerning
             hospitalitie
             and
             constancie
             in
             that
             which
             is
             good
             .
          
           
             The
             Epistle
             of
             Iude
             ,
             of
             constancie
             in
             the
             faith
             against
             false
             Prophets
             .
          
           
             
               And
               thus
               the
               Canonicall
               Scripture
               is
               distinguished
               by
               her
               bookes
               .
            
          
           
             Now
             there
             are
             verie
             strong
             proofes
             ,
             which
             shew
             that
             she
             alone
             is
             the
             word
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             no
             other
             besides
             .
          
           
             Of
             these
             proofes
             one
             doth
             make
             a
             man
             certainelie
             to
             *
             know
             the
             same
             ,
             the
             other
             doth
             but
             declare
             or
             testifie
             it
             .
          
           
             Of
             the
             former
             kind
             there
             is
             onelie
             one
             ,
             namely
             the
             inward
             testimony
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             speaking
             in
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             and
             not
             only
             telling
             a
             man
             within
             in
             his
             heart
             ,
             but
             also
             effectually
             perswading
             him
             that
             these
             bookes
             of
             the
             Scripture
             are
             the
             word
             of
             God.
             Isai.
             59.
             21.
             
             
               My
               Spirit
               ,
               that
               is
               vpon
               thee
               ,
               and
               my
               words
               which
               I
               haue
               put
               in
               thy
               mouth
               ,
               shall
               not
               depart
               out
               of
               thy
               mouth
               —
               from
               henceforth
               euen
               for
               euer
               .
            
          
           
           
             The
             manner
             of
             perswading
             is
             on
             this
             wise
             :
             The
             Eelect
             hauing
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God
             doe
             first
             discerne
             the
             voyce
             of
             Christ
             speaking
             in
             the
             scriptures
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             that
             voyce
             ,
             which
             they
             doe
             discerne
             ,
             they
             doe
             approoue
             :
             and
             that
             which
             they
             doe
             approue
             ,
             they
             doe
             beleeue
             .
             Lastly
             ,
             beleeuing
             they
             are
             (
             as
             it
             were
             )
             sealed
             with
             the
             seale
             of
             the
             Spirit
             .
             Ephe.
             1
             13.
             
             
               Wherein
               also
               after
               that
               ye
               beleeued
               ,
               yee
               were
               sealed
               with
               the
               holy
               Spirit
               of
               promise
               .
            
          
           
             The
             Church
             also
             may
             beare
             witnesse
             of
             the
             Canon
             ,
             perswade
             she
             cannot
             .
             For
             by
             this
             meanes
             the
             voyce
             of
             the
             Church
             should
             be
             of
             greater
             force
             then
             the
             voyce
             of
             God
             :
             and
             the
             whole
             state
             of
             mans
             saluation
             should
             depend
             vpon
             men
             ;
             than
             which
             what
             can
             be
             said
             to
             be
             more
             miserable
             ?
          
           
             Obiect
             .
             The
             Scripture
             is
             the
             word
             of
             God
             by
             it selfe
             ,
             but
             it
             is
             not
             so
             to
             vs
             ,
             but
             by
             the
             iudgement
             of
             the
             Church
             .
             Ans.
             1.
             
             The
             distinction
             is
             vaine
             .
             For
             ,
             the
             first
             part
             thereof
             sheweth
             the
             manner
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Scripture
             is
             the
             word
             of
             God
             :
             the
             latter
             part
             sheweth
             not
             the
             manner
             how
             ,
             but
             the
             person
             to
             whom
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Scripture
             doth
             
             also
             testifie
             the
             same
             thing
             with
             that
             kind
             of
             testimonie
             ,
             which
             is
             surer
             euen
             then
             all
             the
             oathes
             of
             men
             .
             For
             we
             haue
             the
             voyce
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             speaking
             in
             the
             Scripture
             :
             who
             doth
             also
             worke
             in
             our
             hearts
             a
             certaine
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             full
             perswasion
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             when
             we
             are
             exercised
             in
             hearing
             ,
             reading
             and
             meditating
             of
             thē
             .
             Neither
             doe
             we
             beleeue
             a
             thing
             ,
             because
             the
             Church
             saith
             it
             is
             to
             beleeued
             :
             but
             therefore
             we
             doe
             beleeue
             a
             thing
             ,
             because
             that
             which
             the
             Church
             speaketh
             ,
             the
             Scripture
             did
             first
             speake
             .
             Yea
             the
             Church
             cannot
             stand
             ,
             nor
             yet
             be
             imagined
             without
             faith
             :
             faith
             is
             not
             without
             the
             word
             :
             which
             word
             is
             the
             Rule
             or
             Obiect
             of
             faith
             :
             and
             not
             the
             iudgement
             ,
             though
             it
             be
             of
             most
             holy
             men
             .
             3.
             
             He
             which
             doubteth
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             will
             doubt
             as
             well
             of
             the
             testimonie
             of
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             Obiect
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Church
             hath
             a
             iudgement
             to
             determine
             of
             matters
             ,
             Act.
             15.
             28.
             
             
               It
               seemeth
               good
               to
               the
               holy
               Ghost
               and
               to
               vs.
               Ans.
            
             1.
             
             The
             soueraigne
             or
             supreame
             iudgement
             concerning
             matters
             of
             faith
             belongeth
             to
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             speaking
             in
             the
             Scriptures
             .
             The
             ministerie
             of
             iudgement
             
             (
             or
             a
             ministeriall
             iudgement
             )
             is
             only
             giuen
             vnto
             the
             Church
             :
             because
             she
             must
             iudge
             according
             to
             the
             Scriptures
             :
             and
             because
             she
             doth
             not
             this
             alwaies
             ,
             but
             sometimes
             faileth
             .
             2.
             
             The
             Apostles
             were
             present
             at
             that
             Councell
             which
             was
             held
             at
             Ierusalem
             ,
             who
             were
             men
             that
             had
             authoritie
             which
             was
             *
             of
             it selfe
             to
             be
             beleeued
             ,
             
             which
             authoritie
             the
             Ecclesiasticall
             ministery
             now
             hath
             not
             .
          
           
             The
             proofe
             of
             declaration
             or
             testification
             is
             that
             ,
             which
             doth
             not
             demonstrate
             or
             perswade
             ,
             but
             only
             testifie
             ,
             and
             by
             certaine
             tokens
             approue
             the
             true
             Canon
             .
             This
             proofe
             is
             manifold
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             the
             perpetuall
             consent
             of
             the
             Church
             :
             of
             the
             ancient
             Church
             of
             the
             Iewes
             .
             Rom.
             3.
             2.
             
             
               For
               chieflie
               ,
               because
               vnto
               them
               were
               of
               credit
               committed
               the
               Oracles
               of
               God.
            
             And
             of
             the
             new
             and
             latter
             Church
             .
             1.
             
             From
             Christ
             and
             the
             Apostles
             ,
             who
             cited
             testimonies
             foorth
             of
             those
             bookes
             .
          
           
             2.
             
             From
             the
             Fathers
             .
             
               
                 First
                 ,
                 Origen
                 ,
                 as
                 Eusebius
                 testifieth
                 ,
                 
                   Lib.
                   6.
                   18.
                   
                   &
                
                 23.
                 
              
               
                 2.
                 
                 Melito
                 ,
                 as
                 the
                 same
                 Eusebius
                 witnesseth
                 ;
                 
                 Lib.
                 4.
                 
              
               
                 3.
                 
                 Athanasius
                 .
              
               
                 4.
                 
                 Cyril
                 ,
                 Serm.
                 4.
                 
              
               
                 5.
                 
                 Cyprian
                 ,
                 or
                 rather
                 Ruffine
                 in
                 his
                 exposition
                 of
                 the
                 Creed
                 .
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 In
                 his
                 preface
                 vpon
                 the
                 first
                 Psalme
                 .
              
               
                 7.
                 
                 
                   Hierome
                   ,
                   in
                   Prologo
                   Gal.
                
                 and
                 in
                 his
                 preface
                 vpon
                 the
                 bookes
                 of
                 Salomon
                 .
              
               
                 8.
                 
                 Epiphanius
                 ,
                 in
                 his
                 booke
                 of
                 weights
                 and
                 measures
                 .
              
               
                 9.
                 
                 Damascene
                 in
                 his
                 fourth
                 booke
                 of
                 faith
                 ,
                 chap.
                 18.
                 
              
               
                 10.
                 
                 Gregorie
                 ,
                 Moral
                 .
                 on
                 Iob.
                 lib.
                 9.
                 chap.
                 27.
                 
              
            
          
           
             3.
             
             In
             Councels
             ,
             the
             Nicene
             ,
             and
             Laodiccan
             .
             Can.
             59.
             
          
           
             With
             these
             agree
             
               Hugo
               de
               Sancto
               Victore
            
             in
             his
             first
             booke
             of
             Sacraments
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             
             
               N.
               Lyra
            
             in
             his
             prologue
             vpon
             the
             bookes
             of
             Aprocrypha
             .
             
               Hugo
               Cardinalis
               in
               prologo
               in
               Iosuam
               .
            
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             the
             consent
             in
             part
             made
             by
             the
             Gentiles
             ,
             and
             enemies
             affirming
             the
             same
             things
             ,
             which
             are
             deliuered
             in
             holie
             Scriptures
             .
          
           
             1.
             
             Of
             the
             creation
             spake
             Homer
             ,
             and
             
               Plato
               in
               Timaeo
            
             .
          
           
           
             2.
             
             Of
             Christ
             ,
             
               Iosephus
               lib.
               20.
               
               Antiquit.
               cap.
               6.
               
               &
            
             8.
             and
             in
             his
             sixt
             booke
             of
             the
             warre
             of
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             chap.
             8.
             and
             booke
             the
             6.
             chap.
             25.
             27.
             28.
             47.
             
          
           
             3.
             
             Of
             the
             Redeemer
             of
             the
             world
             ,
             who
             was
             to
             be
             exhibited
             in
             the
             last
             times
             ,
             prophecied
             the
             Sibylls
             ,
             as
             Lactantius
             recordeth
             ,
             
               lib.
               4.
               cap.
            
             6.
             and
             
               Cicero
               ,
               lib.
               2.
               de
               Diuinat
               .
            
             and
             Virgil
             in
             the
             fourth
             Eclogue
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Of
             the
             miracles
             of
             Christ
             ,
             Suetonius
             speaketh
             in
             Nero
             :
             and
             
               Tacitus
               ,
               lib.
               5.
               
               &
            
             20.
             
          
           
             5.
             
             Of
             the
             Wisemens
             starre
             ,
             
               Plin.
               lib.
               2.
               
               &
            
             .
             25.
             
          
           
             6.
             
             Of
             the
             slaughtering
             of
             the
             infants
             ,
             
               Macrobus
               in
               Satur.
            
             
          
           
             7.
             
             Of
             the
             death
             of
             
               Herod
               Agrippa
               ,
               Iosephus
            
             in
             his
             19.
             booke
             of
             Antiquities
             ,
             chap.
             7.
             
          
           
             8.
             
             Of
             the
             flood
             ,
             Berosus
             in
             those
             fragments
             which
             are
             extant
             .
             
               Iosephus
               Antiq.
            
             booke
             1.
             chap.
             3.
             
             And
             the
             Poets
             .
          
           
             9.
             
             Of
             the
             tower
             of
             Babel
             Eupolemus
             speaketh
             ,
             as
             Eusebius
             testifieth
             ,
             
               De
               praeparat
               .
               Euangel
            
             .
          
           
             10.
             
             Of
             the
             Doue
             which
             Noe
             sent
             out
             ,
             Plutarch
             mentioneth
             ,
             
               Lib.
               quod
               Bruta
               
               sunt
               rationalia
               .
            
          
           
             11.
             
             Of
             Iaphet
             the
             sonne
             of
             Noe
             the
             Poets
             fable
             many
             things
             .
          
           
             12.
             
             Of
             Abrahams
             sacrifice
             ,
             
               Alexander
               Polyhist
            
             .
          
           
             13.
             
             Of
             the
             miracles
             of
             
               Moses
               ,
               Plinie
            
             speaketh
             :
             though
             he
             do
             ill
             in
             calling
             him
             a
             Magitian
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             the
             Antiquitie
             of
             the
             word
             ,
             for
             it
             cōtaineth
             in
             it
             a
             narration
             of
             things
             done
             from
             the
             beginning
             of
             the
             world
             .
             But
             the
             most
             ancient
             humane
             Historie
             whatsoeuer
             was
             not
             written
             by
             any
             before
             the
             daies
             of
             Ezra
             and
             Nehemiah
             ,
             who
             were
             about
             the
             yeare
             of
             the
             worlds
             creation
             
             three
             thousand
             and
             fiue
             hundreth
             .
          
           
             Fourthly
             ,
             the
             most
             certaine
             accomplishment
             of
             the
             prophecies
             :
             as
             are
             these
             ,
             of
             the
             calling
             of
             the
             Gentiles
             :
             of
             Antichrist
             :
             of
             the
             apostasie
             of
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             &c.
             
          
           
             Fiftly
             ,
             the
             matter
             thereof
             :
             which
             is
             of
             one
             true
             God
             ,
             of
             the
             true
             worship
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             that
             God
             is
             the
             Sauiour
             .
          
           
             Sixtly
             ,
             the
             consent
             of
             all
             the
             parts
             of
             the
             Scripture
             .
          
           
             Seauenthly
             ,
             the
             miraculous
             preseruation
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             in
             the
             perils
             of
             the
             
             Church
             ,
             and
             in
             the
             time
             of
             generall
             reuolting
             .
          
           
             Eightly
             ,
             the
             operation
             thereof
             :
             for
             it
             conuerteth
             men
             ,
             and
             though
             it
             bee
             flatlie
             contrarie
             to
             the
             reason
             and
             affections
             of
             men
             ,
             yet
             it
             winneth
             them
             vnto
             it selfe
             .
          
           
             Ninthly
             ,
             it
             is
             full
             of
             maiestie
             in
             the
             simplenes
             of
             the
             words
             .
             Lastly
             the
             holy
             pen-men
             set
             downe
             their
             owne
             corruptions
             :
             and
             Moses
             commendeth
             himselfe
             ,
             saying
             that
             he
             was
             the
             meekest
             of
             all
             men
             ;
             which
             argueth
             that
             they
             were
             led
             by
             the
             holie
             Ghost
             .
             And
             Christ
             ,
             who
             is
             described
             in
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             affirmeth
             very
             plainely
             that
             he
             is
             the
             sonne
             of
             God
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             is
             one
             with
             God
             the
             father
             ,
             and
             challengeth
             all
             the
             glorie
             of
             God
             vnto
             himselfe
             .
             Which
             if
             it
             had
             not
             bin
             right
             and
             true
             ,
             he
             should
             haue
             felt
             the
             wrath
             of
             God
             with
             Adam
             and
             with
             Herod
             ,
             who
             would
             needes
             bee
             like
             vnto
             God.
             But
             on
             the
             contrarie
             ,
             God
             hath
             reuenged
             his
             death
             both
             vpon
             Herod
             ,
             and
             vpon
             the
             Iewes
             ,
             and
             vpon
             Pilate
             ,
             and
             vpon
             those
             Emperours
             that
             persecuted
             the
             Church
             .
          
           
             And
             thus
             we
             haue
             seene
             the
             *
             tokens
             of
             the
             Scripture
             .
             Whereby
             it
             appeareth
             that
             
             the
             booke
             of
             Tobit
             ,
             the
             prayer
             of
             Manasses
             ,
             the
             boooke
             of
             Iudith
             ,
             the
             booke
             of
             Baruch
             ,
             the
             Epistle
             of
             Ieremy
             ,
             the
             additions
             to
             Daniel
             ,
             the
             third
             and
             fourth
             booke
             of
             Ezra
             ,
             the
             additions
             to
             the
             book
             of
             Hester
             ,
             the
             two
             bookes
             of
             Machabees
             ,
             the
             booke
             of
             Wisedome
             ,
             and
             Ecclesiasticus
             are
             not
             to
             be
             reckoned
             in
             the
             Canon
             .
             Reas.
             1.
             
             They
             are
             not
             written
             by
             the
             Prophets
             .
             2.
             
             They
             are
             not
             written
             in
             Hebrew
             .
             3.
             
             Christ
             and
             his
             Apostles
             alledged
             in
             the
             new
             Testament
             no
             testimonies
             out
             of
             those
             bookes
             .
             4.
             
             They
             containe
             some
             feigned
             things
             ,
             and
             contrarie
             to
             the
             Scriptures
             .
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             IIII.
             
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               interpretation
               of
               the
               Scriptures
               .
            
          
           
             HItherto
             hath
             been
             spoken
             of
             the
             obiect
             of
             Preaching
             .
             The
             parts
             thereof
             are
             two
             .
             Preparation
             for
             the
             sermon
             ,
             and
             the
             Promulgation
             or
             vttering
             of
             it
             .
             Matth.
             13.
             52.
             
             
               Then
               said
               he
               vnto
               them
               ,
               therefore
               euery
               Scribe
               ,
               which
               is
               
               taught
               vnto
               the
               kingdome
               of
               heauen
               ,
               is
               like
               vnto
               an
               housholder
               ,
               which
               bringeth
               forth
               out
               of
               his
               treasure
               both
               new
               and
               old
               .
            
          
           
             In
             preparation
             priuate
             studie
             is
             with
             diligence
             to
             be
             vsed
             .
             1.
             
             Tim.
             4.
             13.
             
             
               Till
               I
               come
               giue
               attendance
               to
               reading
               ,
               to
               exhortation
               ,
               and
               to
               doctrine
               .
            
             1.
             
             Pet.
             1.
             10.
             
             
               Of
               the
               which
               saluation
               the
               Prophets
               haue
               inquired
               and
               searched
               ,
               which
               prophecied
               of
               the
               grace
               that
               should
               come
               vnto
               you
               .
            
             Dan.
             9.
             2.
             
             
               In
               the
               first
               yeere
               of
               his
               raigne
               I
               Daniel
               vnderstood
               by
               bookes
               the
               number
               of
               the
               yeeres
               .
            
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             studie
             of
             Diuinitie
             take
             this
             aduice
             .
             First
             ,
             diligently
             imprint
             both
             in
             thy
             mind
             and
             memory
             the
             substance
             of
             Diuinitie
             described
             with
             definitions
             ,
             diuisions
             ,
             and
             explications
             of
             the
             properties
             .
             Secondly
             ,
             proceede
             to
             the
             reading
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             in
             this
             order
             .
             Vsing
             a
             grammaticall
             ,
             rhetoricall
             ,
             and
             logicall
             *
             analysis
             ,
             and
             the
             helpe
             of
             the
             rest
             of
             the
             arts
             ,
             reade
             first
             the
             Epistle
             of
             Paul
             to
             the
             Rom.
             after
             that
             the
             Gospell
             of
             Iohn
             (
             as
             being
             indeed
             the
             keyes
             of
             the
             new
             Testament
             )
             and
             then
             the
             other
             books
             of
             the
             new
             Testamēt
             .
             will
             be
             more
             easie
             when
             they
             are
             read
             .
             When
             all
             this
             is
             done
             ,
             learne
             first
             the
             dogmaticall
             
             bookes
             of
             the
             old
             Testament
             ,
             especiallie
             the
             Psalmes
             :
             then
             the
             Propheticall
             ,
             especially
             Esay
             :
             Lastly
             the
             historicall
             ,
             but
             chieflie
             Genesis
             .
             For
             it
             is
             likelie
             that
             the
             Apostles
             and
             Euangelists
             read
             Esay
             and
             the
             Psalmes
             very
             much
             .
             For
             there
             are
             no
             bookes
             of
             the
             old
             Testament
             ,
             out
             of
             which
             we
             can
             reade
             more
             testimonies
             to
             be
             cited
             ,
             then
             out
             of
             these
             .
             There
             are
             about
             threescore
             places
             alledged
             out
             of
             Esay
             :
             and
             threescore
             and
             foure
             out
             of
             the
             Psalmes
             .
             Thirdly
             ,
             out
             of
             *
             orthodoxall
             writings
             ,
             we
             must
             get
             aid
             not
             onely
             from
             the
             latter
             ,
             but
             also
             from
             the
             more
             ancient
             Church
             .
             Because
             Sathan
             hath
             raised
             vp
             from
             the
             dead
             the
             old
             Heretiques
             ,
             that
             he
             might
             hinder
             the
             restoratiō
             of
             the
             Church
             ,
             which
             is
             begun
             to
             bee
             made
             in
             our
             time
             .
             For
             the
             Antitrinitaries
             haue
             newly
             varnished
             that
             opinion
             of
             Arius
             and
             Sabellius
             .
             The
             Anabantists
             renew
             the
             doctrines
             or
             sects
             of
             the
             Essees
             ,
             Catharists
             ,
             Enthusiasts
             ,
             and
             Donatists
             .
             The
             Swenkseldians
             reuiue
             the
             opinions
             of
             the
             Eutychians
             ,
             Enthusiasts
             ,
             &c.
             
             Menon
             followeth
             Ebion
             :
             and
             the
             Papists
             resemble
             the
             Pharisies
             ,
             Encratites
             ,
             Tatians
             ,
             Pelagians
             .
             The
             Libertines
             
             renew
             the
             opinions
             of
             the
             Gnosticks
             and
             Carpocratians
             .
             Seruetus
             hath
             reuiued
             the
             heresies
             of
             
               Samosatenus
               ,
               Arrius
               ,
               Eutyches
               ,
               Marcion
               ,
            
             and
             Apollinaris
             .
             Lastly
             ,
             the
             Schismatiques
             ,
             that
             separate
             themselues
             from
             euangelical
             Churches
             ,
             receiue
             the
             opinions
             ,
             facts
             ,
             and
             fashions
             of
             Pup●anus
             in
             Cyprian
             ,
             of
             the
             Audians
             ,
             and
             Donatists
             .
             Therefore
             in
             like
             manner
             ,
             wee
             must
             not
             so
             much
             seeke
             for
             new
             repealings
             and
             confutations
             of
             these
             heresies
             ,
             as
             wee
             are
             for
             our
             vse
             to
             fetch
             those
             ancient
             ones
             out
             of
             Councils
             and
             Fathers
             ,
             and
             to
             accompt
             them
             as
             approued
             and
             firme
             .
             Fourthly
             ,
             those
             things
             ,
             which
             in
             studying
             thou
             meetest
             with
             ,
             that
             are
             necessarie
             and
             worthie
             to
             be
             obserued
             ,
             thou
             must
             put
             in
             thy
             tables
             or
             Common-place
             books
             ,
             that
             thou
             maiest
             alwaies
             haue
             in
             a
             readines
             both
             old
             and
             new
             .
             Fiftly
             ,
             before
             all
             these
             things
             God
             must
             carnestly
             be
             sued
             vnto
             by
             prayer
             ,
             that
             hee
             would
             blesse
             these
             meanes
             ,
             and
             that
             he
             would
             open
             the
             meaning
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             to
             vs
             that
             are
             blind
             .
             Psalm
             .
             119.
             18.
             
             
               Open
               mine
               eies
               ,
               that
               I
               may
               see
               the
               wonderfull
               things
               of
               thy
               Law.
            
             Reuel
             .
             3.
             18.
             
             
               I
               aduise
               thee
               to
               buy
               gold
               for
               thee
               —
               and
               
               to
               annoint
               thine
               eyes
               with
               eye-salue
               ,
               that
               thou
               maist
               see
               .
            
          
           
             Hitherto
             pertaineth
             the
             framing
             of
             Common-place
             bookes
             .
             Concerning
             which
             obserue
             this
             slender
             counsel
             .
             1.
             
             Haue
             in
             readinesse
             common-place
             heads
             of
             euery
             point
             of
             diuinitie
             .
             2.
             
             Distinguish
             the
             formost
             pages
             of
             thy
             paper
             booke
             into
             two
             columnes
             ,
             or
             equall
             parts
             lengthwise
             .
             In
             euery
             one
             of
             those
             pages
             set
             in
             the
             top
             the
             title
             of
             one
             head
             or
             chiefe
             point
             ,
             the
             contrarie
             side
             remaining
             in
             the
             meane
             while
             emptie
             ,
             that
             fresh
             paper
             may
             be
             put
             to
             .
             3.
             
             All
             things
             ,
             which
             thou
             readest
             ,
             are
             not
             to
             be
             written
             in
             thy
             book
             ,
             but
             those
             things
             that
             are
             worthie
             to
             bee
             remembred
             ,
             and
             are
             seldome
             met
             with-Neither
             must
             thou
             put
             the
             words
             of
             the
             Author
             in
             thy
             common
             places
             ,
             but
             briefly
             note
             downe
             the
             principall
             points
             of
             stories
             and
             of
             things
             ,
             that
             thou
             mayst
             know
             from
             what
             author
             to
             fetch
             them
             ,
             when
             thou
             shalt
             haue
             vse
             :
             and
             make
             a
             point
             in
             the
             author
             himselfe
             ,
             that
             thou
             mayst
             know
             ,
             that
             the
             thing
             is
             there
             handled
             ,
             which
             thou
             wrotest
             in
             thy
             common-place
             booke
             .
             4.
             
             Because
             some
             things
             do
             
             very
             often
             offer
             thēselues
             with
             a
             doubtful
             signification
             ,
             so
             as
             that
             thou
             canst
             not
             tell
             ,
             if
             thou
             write
             thē
             in
             thy
             common
             places
             ,
             from
             whence
             to
             fetch
             them
             ,
             therefore
             to
             thy
             common
             places
             thou
             must
             ioyne
             an
             alphabeticall
             table
             .
             5.
             
             Alwaies
             prouided
             that
             thou
             trust
             not
             too
             much
             to
             thy
             places
             .
             For
             it
             is
             not
             sufficient
             to
             haue
             a
             thing
             written
             in
             thy
             booke
             ,
             vnlesse
             it
             be
             also
             diligentlie
             laid
             and
             locked
             vp
             in
             thy
             memorie
             .
          
           
             Preparation
             hath
             two
             parts
             ,
             Interpretation
             ,
             and
             
               right
               diuision
               or
            
             *
             cutting
             .
          
           
             Interpretation
             is
             the
             *
             Opening
             of
             the
             words
             and
             sentences
             of
             the
             Scripture
             ,
             that
             one
             entire
             and
             naturall
             sense
             may
             appeare
             .
          
           
             The
             Church
             of
             Rome
             maketh
             4.
             senses
             of
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             the
             literall
             ,
             allegoricall
             ,
             tropological
             ,
             &
             anagogicall
             ,
             as
             in
             this
             her
             example
             .
             
               Melchizedek
               offered
               bread
               and
               wine
            
             .
             The
             literall
             sense
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             King
             of
             Salem
             with
             meate
             which
             he
             brought
             ,
             refreshed
             the
             souldiers
             of
             Abraham
             being
             tyred
             with
             trauell
             .
             The
             allegoricall
             is
             ,
             that
             the
             Priest
             doth
             offer
             vp
             Christin
             y
             e
             Masse
             .
             The
             tropologicall
             is
             ,
             therefore
             something
             
             is
             to
             be
             giuen
             to
             the
             poore
             .
             The
             Anagogicall
             is
             ,
             that
             Christ
             in
             like
             manner
             being
             in
             heauen
             ,
             shall
             be
             the
             bread
             of
             life
             to
             the
             faithfull
             .
             But
             this
             her
             deuice
             of
             the
             fourefold
             meaning
             of
             the
             scripture
             must
             be
             exploded
             and
             reiected
             .
          
           
             
               There
               is
               one
               onelie
               sense
               ,
               and
               the
               same
               is
               the
               literall
               .
            
             An
             allegorie
             is
             onely
             a
             certaine
             manner
             of
             vttering
             the
             same
             sense
             .
             The
             Anagoge
             and
             Tropologie
             are
             waies
             ,
             whereby
             the
             sense
             may
             be
             applied
             .
          
           
             The
             principall
             interpreter
             of
             the
             Scripture
             is
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             .
             2.
             
             Pet.
             1.
             20.
             
             
               So
               that
               ye
               first
               know
               this
               ,
               that
               no
               prophecie
               in
               the
               Scripture
               is
               of
               any
               priuate
            
             *
             interpretation
             .
             Moreouer
             ,
             he
             that
             makes
             the
             law
             ,
             is
             the
             best
             and
             the
             highest
             interpreter
             of
             the
             law
             .
          
           
             The
             supreame
             and
             absolute
             meane
             of
             interpretation
             is
             the
             Scripture
             it selfe
             .
             Nehem.
             8.
             8.
             
             
               And
               they
               read
               in
               the
               booke
               of
               the
               Law
               of
               God
               distinctly
               ,
               and
               gaue
               the
               sense
               ,
               and
               caused
               them
               to
               vnderstand
               by
               the
               Scripture
               it selfe
               ,
               per
               Scripturam
               ipsam
               .
            
          
           
             The
             meanes
             subordinated
             to
             the
             scripture
             are
             three
             ;
             the
             Analogie
             of
             faith
             ,
             the
             circumstances
             of
             the
             place
             propounded
             ,
             
             and
             the
             comparing
             of
             places
             together
             .
          
           
             The
             analogie
             of
             faith
             is
             a
             certaine
             abridgement
             or
             summe
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             ,
             collected
             out
             of
             most
             manifest
             and
             familiar
             places
             .
             The
             parts
             thereof
             are
             two
             .
             The
             first
             concerneth
             faith
             ,
             which
             is
             handled
             in
             the
             Apostles
             Creede
             .
             The
             second
             concerneth
             charitie
             or
             loue
             ,
             which
             is
             explicated
             in
             the
             ten
             Commaundements
             .
             2.
             
             Tim.
             1.
             13.
             
             
               Keepe
               the
               true
            
             *
             
               paterne
               of
               the
               wholsome
               words
               ,
               which
               thou
               hast
               heard
               of
               me
               ,
               with
               faith
               and
               loue
               which
               is
               in
               Christ
               Iesus
               .
            
          
           
             The
             circumstances
             of
             the
             place
             propounded
             are
             these
             :
             
               Who
               ?
               to
               whom
               ?
               vpon
               what
               occasion
               ?
               at
               what
               time
               ?
               in
               what
               place
               ?
               for
               what
               end
               ?
               what
               goeth
               before
               ?
               what
               followeth
               ?
            
          
           
             The
             collation
             or
             comparing
             of
             places
             together
             ,
             is
             that
             ,
             whereby
             places
             are
             set
             like
             parallels
             one
             beside
             another
             ,
             that
             the
             meaning
             of
             them
             may
             more
             euidentlie
             appeare
             .
             Act.
             9.
             22.
             
             
               But
               Saul
               increased
               the
               more
               in
               strength
               ,
               and
               confounded
               the
               Iewes
               ,
               which
               dwelt
               at
               Damascus
               ,
               confirming
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             conferring
             or
             conioyning
             of
             places
             of
             Scriptures
             ,
             as
             Artificers
             
             being
             about
             to
             compact
             or
             ioyne
             a
             thing
             together
             are
             wont
             to
             fit
             all
             the
             parts
             amongst
             themselues
             ,
             that
             one
             of
             them
             may
             perfectly
             agree
             with
             each
             other
             )
             
               that
               this
               was
               that
               Christ.
            
             
          
           
             Collation
             of
             places
             is
             two-fold
             .
             The
             first
             is
             the
             comparing
             of
             the
             place
             propounded
             with
             it selfe
             cited
             and
             repeated
             else-where
             in
             holy
             writ
             .
             Esa.
             6.
             10.
             
             
               Make
               the
               heart
               of
               this
               people
               fat
               ,
               make
               their
               eares
               heauie
               ,
               and
               shut
               their
               eyes
               ,
               lest
               they
               see
               with
               their
               eyes
               ,
               and
               heare
               with
               their
               eares
               ,
               and
               vnderstand
               with
               their
               hearts
               ,
               and
               conuert
               ,
               and
               he
               heale
               them
               .
            
             This
             place
             is
             sixe
             times
             repeated
             in
             the
             new
             testament
             .
             Mat.
             13.
             14.
             
             Marke
             4.
             12.
             
             Luke
             8.
             10.
             
             Iohn
             12.
             40.
             
             Act.
             28.
             27.
             
             Rom.
             11.
             8.
             
          
           
             Places
             repeated
             haue
             often
             alterations
             for
             sundrie
             causes
             .
             These
             causes
             are
             ,
             first
             exegeticall
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             for
             exposition
             sake
             ,
             as
          
           
             Psal.
             78.
             2.
             compared
             with
             Mat.
             13.
             35.
             
          
           
             
               
                 
                   I
                   will
                   opē
                   my
                   mouth
                   in
                   a
                   parable
                   :
                   I
                   will
                   declare
                   *
                   things
                   hidden
                   from
                   of
                   old
                   .
                
                 
                   I
                   will
                   opē
                   my
                   mouth
                   in
                   parables
                   ,
                   and
                   will
                   vtter
                   the
                   things
                   which
                   haue
                   been
                   kept
                   secret
                   from
                   the
                   foundation
                   of
                   the
                   world
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 
                   
                     Psal.
                     78.
                     24.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Iohn
                     6.
                     31.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   He
                   gaue
                   them
                   of
                   the
                   wheat
                   of
                   heauen
                   .
                
                 
                   He
                   gaue
                   the
                   bread
                   from
                   heauen
                   to
                   eate
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Isai.
                     28.
                     16.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Rom.
                     9.
                     33.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Behold
                   I
                   will
                   lay
                   in
                   Sion
                   a
                   stone
                   ,
                   a
                   tried
                   stone
                   ,
                   a
                   precious
                   corner
                   stone
                   ,
                   a
                   sure
                   foūdation
                   .
                   He
                   that
                   beleeueth
                   shall
                   not
                   make
                   bast
                   .
                
                 
                   Behold
                   ,
                   I
                   lay
                   in
                   Sion
                   a
                   stumbling
                   block
                   ,
                   and
                   a
                   rocke
                   to
                   make
                   men
                   fal
                   ,
                   and
                   euery
                   one
                   that
                   beleeueth
                   in
                   him
                   shall
                   not
                   be
                   ashamed
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Psal.
                     110.
                     1.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     Cor.
                     15.
                     25.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Sit
                   thou
                   at
                   my
                   right
                   hand
                   vntill
                   I
                   make
                   thine
                   enemies
                   thy
                   foot
                   stoole
                   .
                
                 
                   He
                   must
                   raigne
                   till
                   he
                   haue
                   put
                   all
                   his
                   enemies
                   vnder
                   his
                   feet
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Psal.
                     116.
                     10.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     2.
                     
                     Cor.
                     4.
                     13.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   I
                   beleeued
                   ,
                   *
                   because
                   I
                   did
                   speake
                   .
                
                 
                   I
                   beleeued
                   ,
                   and
                   therefore
                   haue
                   I
                   spoken
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Gen.
                     13.
                     15.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Gal.
                     3.
                     16.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   All
                   the
                   land
                   which
                   thou
                   seest
                   ,
                   will
                   I
                   giue
                   vnto
                   thee
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   thy
                
                 
                   Now
                   to
                   Abraham
                   and
                   to
                   his
                   seede
                   were
                   the
                   promises
                   made
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   
                   seede
                   for
                   euer
                   .
                
                 
                   He
                   saith
                   not
                   vnto
                   the
                   seedes
                   ,
                   as
                   speaking
                   of
                   many
                   :
                   but
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   thy
                   seed
                   ,
                   as
                   of
                   one
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   Christ.
                   
                
              
            
          
           
             A
             second
             cause
             is
             diacriticall
             ,
             or
             for
             discerning
             sake
             ,
             that
             places
             ,
             and
             times
             and
             persons
             might
             bee
             mutuallie
             distinguished
             .
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     Michah
                     5.
                     2.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Mat.
                     6.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   And
                   thou
                   Bethlehem
                   Ephrathah
                   art
                   little
                   to
                   be
                   among
                   the
                   Princes
                   of
                   Iudah
                   :
                   out
                   of
                   thee
                   shall
                   hee
                   come
                   forth
                   to
                   me
                   ,
                   that
                   shall
                   be
                   the
                   ruler
                   in
                   Israel
                   .
                
                 
                   And
                   thou
                   Bethlehem
                   in
                   the
                   land
                   of
                   Iudah
                   art
                   not
                   the
                   least
                   among
                   the
                   Princes
                   of
                   Iudah
                   :
                   for
                   out
                   of
                   thee
                   shall
                   come
                   the
                   gouernour
                   ,
                   that
                   shall
                   feed
                   my
                   people
                   Israel
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             these
             causes
             are
             circumscriptiue
             :
             or
             for
             limitation
             sake
             ,
             that
             the
             sense
             and
             sentence
             of
             the
             place
             might
             be
             truelie
             restrained
             ,
             according
             as
             the
             minde
             and
             meaning
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             was
             .
          
           
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     Deut.
                     6.
                     13.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Mat.
                     4.
                     10.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Thou
                   shalt
                   worship
                   the
                   Lord
                   thy
                   God
                   ,
                   and
                   shalt
                   serue
                   him
                   .
                
                 
                   Thou
                   shalt
                   worship
                   the
                   Lord
                   thy
                   God
                   ,
                   and
                   him
                   onelie
                   shalt
                   thou
                   serue
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Isai.
                     29.
                     13.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Matth.
                     15.
                     8.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   This
                   people
                   draweth
                   neere
                   with
                   their
                   mouth
                   and
                   honor
                   me
                   with
                   their
                   lips
                   :
                   but
                   their
                   heart
                   they
                   reremooue
                   farre
                   from
                   me
                   :
                   and
                   their
                   reuerence
                   towards
                   mee
                   is
                   by
                   the
                   commandemēt
                   of
                   men
                   .
                
                 
                   When
                   this
                   people
                   draweth
                   neere
                   vnto
                   me
                   ,
                   they
                   honour
                   mee
                   with
                   their
                   mouth
                   and
                   with
                   their
                   lippes
                   ,
                   but
                   they
                   remooue
                   their
                   heart
                   farre
                   from
                   me
                   .
                   9.
                   
                   In
                   vaine
                   doe
                   they
                   worship
                   me
                   ,
                   teaching
                   for
                   doctrines
                   the
                   cōmandements
                   of
                   men
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Gen.
                     2.
                     24.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Mat.
                     19.
                     5.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Wherefore
                   a
                   man
                   shall
                   leaue
                   his
                   father
                   and
                   his
                   mother
                   ,
                   and
                   shall
                   cleane
                   vnto
                   his
                   wife
                   ,
                   and
                   they
                   shall
                   be
                   one
                   flesh
                   .
                
                 
                   Wherefore
                   a
                   man
                   shall
                   leaue
                   father
                   and
                   mother
                   ,
                   &
                   shal
                   cleane
                   vnto
                   his
                   wife
                   ,
                   &
                   they
                   which
                   were
                   two
                   shall
                   be
                   one
                   flesh
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                   
                     Isai.
                     50.
                     20.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Rom.
                     11.
                     26.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   And
                   the
                   Redeemer
                   shall
                   come
                   vnto
                   Sion
                   ,
                   and
                   vnto
                   them
                   that
                   turne
                   from
                   iniquitie
                   in
                   Iacob
                   ,
                   saith
                   the
                   Lord.
                   
                
                 
                   The
                   Deliuerer
                   shall
                   come
                   out
                   of
                   Sion
                   ,
                   and
                   shall
                   turne
                   away
                   the
                   vngodlines
                   from
                   Iacob
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             A
             fourth
             cause
             is
             for
             application
             sake
             ,
             that
             the
             type
             might
             bee
             fitted
             vnto
             the
             trueth
             :
             and
             the
             generall
             to
             a
             ceretaine
             speciall
             ,
             and
             so
             contrariwise
             .
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     Ionas
                     1.
                     17.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Matth.
                     12.
                     39.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Now
                   the
                   Lord
                   had
                   prepared
                   a
                   great
                   fish
                   to
                   swallow
                   vp
                   Ionah
                   .
                   And
                   Ionah
                   was
                   in
                   the
                   bellie
                   of
                   the
                   fish
                   three
                   daies
                   ,
                   and
                   three
                   nights
                   .
                
                 
                   An
                   euill
                   and
                   adulterous
                   generation
                   seeketh
                   a
                   signe
                   ,
                   but
                   no
                   signe
                   shall
                   be
                   giuen
                   vnto
                   it
                   ,
                   saue
                   the
                   signe
                   of
                   the
                   Prophet
                   Ionas
                   .
                   40.
                   
                   For
                   as
                   Ionas
                   was
                   three
                   dayes
                   and
                   three
                   nights
                   in
                   the
                   whales
                   bellie
                   :
                   So
                   shall
                   the
                   Son
                   of
                   Man
                   be
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 
                   
                     Esay
                     61.
                     1.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Luk.
                     4.
                     18.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     The
                     Spirit
                     of
                     the
                     Lord
                     God
                     is
                     vpō
                     me
                     :
                     therefore
                     hath
                     the
                     Lord
                     annointed
                     mee
                     :
                     hee
                     hath
                     sent
                     mee
                     to
                     preach
                     good
                     tidings
                     vnto
                     the
                     poore
                     to
                     bind
                     vp
                     the
                     broken
                     hearted
                     ,
                     to
                     preach
                     libertie
                     to
                     the
                     Captiues
                     ,
                     and
                     to
                     thē
                     that
                     are
                     bound
                     the
                     opening
                     of
                     the
                     prison
                     :
                  
                   
                     
                       verse
                    
                     2
                  
                   
                     To
                     preach
                     the
                     acceptable
                     yere
                     of
                     the
                     Lord
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     day
                     of
                     vengeance
                     of
                     our
                     god
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     The
                     Spirit
                     of
                     the
                     Lord
                     is
                     vpon
                     mee
                     ,
                     therefore
                     he
                     hath
                     annointed
                     mee
                     that
                     I
                     should
                     preach
                     good
                     tidings
                     to
                     the
                     poore
                     ,
                     hee
                     hath
                     sent
                     me
                     to
                     heale
                     the
                     broken
                     in
                     heart
                     ,
                     that
                     I
                     should
                     preach
                     deliuerance
                     to
                     the
                     Captiues
                     ,
                     &c.
                     
                  
                   
                     
                       verse
                    
                     21
                  
                   
                     This
                     day
                     is
                     this
                     Scripture
                     fulfilled
                     in
                     your
                     eares
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Psal.
                     69.
                     27.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Iohn
                     19.
                     28.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     They
                     gaue
                     me
                     gall
                     for
                     my
                     meate
                     ,
                     and
                     in
                     my
                     thirst
                     they
                     gaue
                     me
                     vineger
                     to
                     drinke
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     That
                     the
                     Scripture
                     might
                     bee
                     fulfilled
                     hee
                     said
                     ,
                     I
                     thirst
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       verse
                    
                     29
                  
                   
                     Therfore
                     there
                     was
                     set
                     a
                     vessell
                     full
                     of
                     vineger
                     :
                     and
                     they
                     filled
                     a
                     sponge
                     with
                     vineger
                     ,
                     
                     and
                     put
                     it
                     about
                     an
                     bysope
                     stalke
                     ,
                     &
                     put
                     it
                     to
                     his
                     mouth
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Exod.
                     12.
                     46.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Ioh.
                     19.
                     36.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     Neither
                     shall
                     yee
                     breake
                     a
                     bone
                     thereof
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     These
                     things
                     were
                     done
                     ,
                     that
                     the
                     Scripture
                     might
                     bee
                     fulfilled
                     ,
                     which
                     saith
                     ,
                     there
                     shall
                     not
                     a
                     bone
                     of
                     him
                     be
                     broken
                     .
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Psal.
                     69.
                     25.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Acts
                     1.
                     20.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     Let
                     their
                     habitations
                     be
                     voyd
                     ,
                     and
                     let
                     none
                     dwell
                     in
                     their
                     tents
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     It
                     is
                     written
                     in
                     the
                     booke
                     of
                     the
                     Psalmes
                     ;
                     Let
                     his
                     habitation
                     be
                     void
                     ,
                     and
                     lēt
                     no
                     man
                     dwell
                     therein
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             Fiftly
             ,
             some
             things
             are
             omitted
             for
             breuitie
             sake
             :
             or
             because
             they
             do
             not
             agree
             with
             the
             matter
             in
             hand
             .
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     Zach.
                     9.
                     9.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Matth.
                     21.
                     5.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     Reioyce
                     greatly
                     O
                     daughter
                     Sion
                     :
                     shout
                     for
                     ioy
                     O
                     daughter
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Tell
                     ye
                     the
                     daughter
                     of
                     Sion
                     ,
                     behold
                     thy
                     King
                     commeth
                     vnto
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                   
                     Ierusalem
                     :
                     behold
                     thy
                     King
                     commeth
                     vnto
                     thee
                     :
                     He
                     is
                     Iust
                     ,
                     and
                     saued
                     himselfe
                     ,
                     poore
                     and
                     riding
                     vpon
                     an
                     Asse
                     ,
                     and
                     vpon
                     a
                     colt
                     the
                     foule
                     of
                     an
                     Asse
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     thee
                     ,
                     meek
                     and
                     sitting
                     vpon
                     an
                     Asse
                     ,
                     and
                     a
                     colt
                     the
                     foale
                     of
                     an
                     Asse
                     vsed
                     to
                     the
                     yoke
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             The
             second
             collation
             is
             of
             the
             place
             propounded
             with
             other
             places
             :
             and
             those
             againe
             are
             either
             like
             or
             vnlike
             .
          
           
             Places
             that
             are
             alike
             are
             such
             ,
             as
             by
             certaine
             waies
             or
             in
             some
             sort
             agree
             one
             with
             another
             .
             And
             places
             doe
             agree
             either
             in
             their
             phrase
             and
             manner
             of
             speech
             ,
             or
             in
             sense
             .
          
           
             Places
             that
             agree
             as
             concerning
             the
             phrase
             ,
             are
             such
             as
             these
             .
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     Gen.
                     28.
                     12.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Iohn
                     1.
                     51.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     Then
                     he
                     dreamed
                     ,
                     &
                     behold
                     there
                     stoode
                     a
                     ladder
                     vpon
                     the
                     earth
                     ,
                     and
                     the
                     top
                     of
                     it
                     reached
                     vp
                     to
                     heauen
                     ,
                     and
                     loe
                     ,
                     the
                     Angels
                     of
                     God
                     went
                     vp
                  
                
                 
                   
                     And
                     he
                     said
                     vnto
                     him
                     ,
                     Uerilie
                     ,
                     verilie
                     ,
                     I
                     say
                     vnto
                     you
                     ,
                     hereafter
                     shall
                     yee
                     see
                     the
                     heauen
                     open
                     ,
                     And
                     the
                     Angels
                     of
                     God
                     ascending
                     &
                     descending
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                   
                     and
                     downe
                     by
                     it
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     vpon
                     the
                     Son
                     of
                     man.
                  
                   
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Gen.
                     3.
                     15.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Rom.
                     16.
                     20.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     I
                     will
                     also
                     put
                     enmitie
                     betweene
                     thee
                     and
                     the
                     woman
                     ,
                     and
                     between
                     thy
                     seede
                     and
                     her
                     seede
                     .
                     Hee
                     shall
                     break
                     thine
                     head
                     ,
                     and
                     thou
                     shalt
                     bruise
                     his
                     heele
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     The
                     God
                     of
                     peace
                     shall
                     breake
                  
                   (
                   
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                     〈◊〉
                  
                   )
                   
                     Sathan
                     vnder
                     your
                     feete
                  
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Gen.
                     8.
                     20.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Ephes.
                     5.
                     2.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     Then
                     Noah
                     built
                     an
                     Altar
                     to
                     the
                     Lord
                     ,
                     and
                     tooke
                     of
                     euerie
                     cleane
                     beast
                     ,
                     and
                     of
                     euery
                     cleane
                     foule
                     ,
                     and
                     offered
                     burnt
                     offerings
                     vpon
                     the
                     Altar
                     .
                     21.
                     
                     And
                     the
                     Lord
                     smelled
                     a
                     sauour
                     ofrest
                     ,
                     and
                     said
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Christ
                     hath
                     loued
                     vs
                     ,
                     and
                     giuen
                     himself
                     for
                     vs
                     an
                     offering
                     and
                     a
                     sacrifice
                     of
                     a
                     sweet
                     smelling
                     sauour
                     to
                     God.
                     
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             For
             the
             finding
             out
             of
             these
             places
             the
             Greeke
             and
             Hebrew
             concordances
             serue
             very
             fitlie
             .
          
           
           
             Places
             ,
             which
             agree
             in
             sense
             ,
             are
             those
             that
             haue
             the
             same
             meaning
             .
             Here
             excelleth
             the
             comparing
             of
             a
             generall
             place
             with
             a
             special
             exāple
             in
             the
             same
             kind
             :
             as
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     Prou.
                     28.
                     13.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Psal.
                     32.
                     3.
                     4.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   He
                   that
                   hideth
                   his
                   sinnes
                   ,
                   shall
                   not
                   prosper
                   ,
                   but
                   he
                   that
                   confesseth
                   and
                   forsaketh
                   them
                   ,
                   shall
                   find
                   mercy
                   .
                
                 
                   When
                   I
                   held
                   my
                   tongue
                   my
                   bones
                   consumed
                   ,
                   &c.
                   5.
                   
                   I
                   acknowledged
                   my
                   finne
                   vnto
                   thee
                   ,
                   neither
                   hid
                   I
                   mine
                   iniquitie
                   .
                   I
                   said
                   ,
                   I
                   will
                   confesse
                   against
                   my selfe
                   my
                   wickednes
                   vnto
                   the
                   Lord
                   ,
                   and
                   thou
                   forgauest
                   the
                   punishmēt
                   of
                   my
                   sinne
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     2.
                     
                     Sam.
                     15.
                     25.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     Pet.
                     5.
                     6.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   The
                   King
                   charged
                   Zadok
                   saying
                   ,
                   carrie
                   the
                   Arke
                   of
                   God
                   againe
                   into
                   the
                   citie
                   .
                   If
                   I
                   shall
                   find
                   fauour
                   in
                   the
                   eies
                   of
                   the
                   Lord
                   ,
                   he
                   wil
                   bring
                   me
                   again
                   ,
                   and
                   shew
                   mee
                   both
                   it
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   tabernacle
                   thereof
                   .
                   
                   
                     
                       verse
                    
                     26
                  
                   But
                   if
                   he
                   thus
                   say
                   ,
                   I
                   haue
                   no
                   delight
                   in
                   thee
                   ,
                   Behold
                   ,
                   here
                   am
                   I
                   ,
                   let
                   him
                   doe
                   to
                   mee
                   ,
                   as
                   seemeth
                   good
                   in
                   his
                   eyes
                   .
                
                 
                   Humble
                   your selues
                   therefore
                   vnder
                   the
                   mightie
                   hand
                   of
                   God
                   ,
                   that
                   he
                   may
                   extol
                   you
                   in
                   due
                   time
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             Thou
             shalt
             haue
             readie
             very
             manie
             places
             of
             this
             kind
             in
             the
             Common-places
             of
             Marlorate
             gathered
             together
             with
             diligence
             .
             And
             thus
             much
             for
             places
             that
             are
             alike
             .
          
           
             Places
             that
             are
             vnlike
             ,
             are
             those
             ,
             which
             in
             shew
             doe
             not
             agree
             ,
             either
             in
             respect
             of
             the
             phrase
             ,
             or
             in
             regard
             of
             the
             meaning
             .
             As
             ,
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     Rom.
                     3.
                     28.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Iam.
                     2.
                     24.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Therefore
                   we
                   conclude
                   that
                   a
                   man
                   is
                   iustified
                   by
                   faith
                   without
                   the
                   workes
                   of
                   the
                   Law.
                   
                
                 
                   Yee
                   see
                   therefore
                   how
                   that
                   of
                   works
                   a
                   man
                   is
                   iustified
                   ;
                   and
                   not
                   of
                   faith
                   onlie
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 
                   
                     1.
                     
                     King.
                     9.
                     28.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     2.
                     
                     Chron.
                     8.
                     18.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   And
                   they
                   came
                   to
                   Ophir
                   ,
                   &
                   they
                   fetched
                   from
                   thence
                   foure
                   hundred
                   and
                   twenty
                   talents
                   of
                   gold
                   ,
                   and
                   brought
                   it
                   to
                   King
                   Salomon
                   .
                
                 
                   And
                   they
                   went
                   with
                   the
                   seruants
                   of
                   Salomon
                   to
                   Ophir
                   ,
                   &
                   brought
                   from
                   thence
                   foure
                   hundred
                   and
                   fiftie
                   talents
                   of
                   gold
                   ,
                   and
                   brought
                   them
                   to
                   King
                   Salomon
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Acts.
                     7.
                     14.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Gen.
                     46.
                     27.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Then
                   sent
                   Ioseph
                   ,
                   and
                   caused
                   his
                   father
                   to
                   bee
                   brought
                   ,
                   and
                   all
                   his
                   kindred
                   ,
                   euen
                   threescore
                   and
                   fifteen
                   soules
                   .
                
                 
                   All
                   the
                   soules
                   of
                   the
                   house
                   of
                   Iacob
                   ,
                   which
                   came
                   into
                   Aegypt
                   are
                   threescore
                   &
                   ten
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Act.
                     7.
                     16.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Gen.
                     48.
                     22.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   And
                   were
                   remooued
                   into
                   Sychem
                   and
                   were
                   put
                   in
                   the
                   Sepulcre
                   ,
                   that
                   Abraham
                   had
                   bought
                   for
                   monie
                   of
                   the
                   sonnes
                   of
                   Emor
                   ,
                   sonne
                   of
                   Sychem
                   .
                
                 
                   I
                   (
                   that
                   is
                   Iacob
                   )
                   haue
                   giuen
                   vnto
                   thee
                   one
                   portion
                   aboue
                   thy
                   brethren
                   ,
                   which
                   I
                   gat
                   out
                   of
                   the
                   hand
                   of
                   the
                   Ammorite
                   by
                   my
                   sword
                   and
                   by
                   my
                   bow
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 
                   
                     Zach.
                     11.
                     13.
                     
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Matth.
                     27.
                     9.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   And
                   I
                   tooke
                   the
                   thirtie
                   peeces
                   of
                   siluer
                   ,
                   and
                   cast
                   them
                   to
                   the
                   potter
                   in
                   the
                   house
                   of
                   the
                   Lord.
                   
                
                 
                   Then
                   was
                   fulfilled
                   that
                   which
                   was
                   spoken
                   by
                   Ieremie
                   the
                   Prophet
                   ,
                   saying
                   ,
                   and
                   they
                   tooke
                   thirtie
                   siluer
                   peeces
                   ,
                   &c.
                   
                
              
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             V.
             
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               waies
               of
               expounding
               .
            
          
           
             THe
             manner
             or
             waies
             of
             Interpreting
             are
             according
             to
             the
             places
             of
             scripture
             ,
             which
             are
             to
             be
             handled
             .
          
           
             Places
             are
             either
             Analogical
             &
             plaine
             ,
             or
             Crypticall
             and
             darke
             .
          
           
             Analogicall
             places
             are
             such
             ,
             as
             haue
             an
             apparent
             meaning
             agreeable
             to
             the
             analogie
             of
             faith
             ,
             and
             that
             at
             the
             first
             view
             .
             Concerning
             these
             places
             receiue
             this
             Rule
             :
          
           
             
               If
               the
               naturall
               signification
               of
               the
               words
               
               of
               the
               place
               propounded
               doe
               agree
               with
               the
               circumstances
               of
               the
               same
               place
               ,
               it
               is
               the
               proper
               meaning
               of
               the
               place
               .
            
             As
             for
             example
             ;
          
           
             Act.
             10.
             43.
             
             
               To
               him
               also
               giue
               all
               the
               Prophets
               witnes
               ,
               that
               through
               his
               name
               ,
               all
               that
               beleeue
               in
               him
               ,
               shall
               receiue
               remission
               of
               sins
               .
            
             The
             significatiō
             of
             the
             words
             of
             this
             place
             is
             very
             manifest
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             
               Iesus
               Christ
               doth
               giue
               righteousnesse
               and
               euerlasting
               life
               to
               those
               that
               doe
               beleeue
               in
               him
               .
            
             And
             this
             sense
             wee
             doe
             presently
             admit
             without
             any
             delay
             ,
             because
             wee
             see
             that
             it
             doth
             agree
             with
             the
             analogie
             of
             faith
             and
             with
             the
             holy
             scriptures
             .
          
           
             We
             must
             further
             know
             ,
             that
             euery
             article
             and
             doctrine
             concerning
             faith
             and
             maners
             ,
             which
             is
             necessary
             vnto
             saluation
             ,
             is
             very
             plainely
             deliuered
             in
             the
             Scriptures
             .
          
           
             Crypticall
             or
             hidden
             places
             are
             those
             ,
             which
             are
             difficult
             and
             darke
             :
             for
             the
             expounding
             of
             them
             let
             this
             be
             thy
             Rule
             and
             leader
             .
          
           
             
               If
               the
               natiue
               (
               or
               naturall
               )
               signification
               of
               the
               words
               doe
               manifestly
               disagree
               with
               ,
               either
               the
               analogy
               of
               faith
               ,
               or
               very
               perspicuous
               places
               of
               the
               Scripture
               :
               thē
               the
               other
               meaning
               ,
               
               which
               is
               giuen
               of
               the
               place
               propounded
               ,
               is
               naturall
               and
               proper
               ,
               if
               it
               agree
               with
               contrarie
               and
               like
               places
               ,
               with
               the
               circumstances
               and
               wordes
               of
               the
               place
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               nature
               of
               that
               thing
               ,
               which
               is
               intreated
               of
               .
            
             As
             for
             example
             ;
             1.
             
             Cor.
             11.
             24.
             
             
               This
               is
               my
               body
               ,
               which
               is
               broken
               for
               you
               .
            
          
           
             The
             sense
             that
             is
             giuen
             by
             some
             :
          
           
             This
             bread
             is
             indeed
             and
             properlie
             the
             bodie
             of
             Christ
             ;
             namely
             by
             conuersion
             .
             Or
             ,
             the
             body
             of
             Christ
             in
             ,
             vnder
             ,
             or
             with
             the
             bread
             .
          
           
             The
             vnfitnesse
             of
             this
             sense
             .
          
           
             The
             *
             letter
             or
             words
             vsed
             in
             this
             place
             being
             retained
             (
             or
             expounded
             accordingly
             without
             any
             alteration
             )
             doth
             disagree
             with
             an
             article
             of
             the
             faith
             ,
             
               He
               ascended
               into
               heauen
            
             ,
             and
             with
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             Sacrament
             ,
             which
             ought
             to
             be
             a
             *
             Memoriall
             of
             the
             bodie
             of
             Christ
             absent
             .
             Therefore
             a
             new
             exposition
             is
             to
             be
             sought
             for
             .
          
           
             A
             new
             or
             second
             sense
             .
          
           
             In
             this
             place
             the
             bread
             is
             a
             signe
             of
             my
             
             bodie
             :
             by
             a
             Metonymie
             of
             the
             subiect
             for
             the
             adiunct
             .
          
           
             The
             fitnes
             of
             this
             exposition
             .
          
           
             First
             ,
             it
             agrees
             with
             the
             analogy
             of
             faith
             ,
             1.
             
             
               He
               ascended
            
             truly
             
               into
               heauen
            
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             he
             was
             taken
             vp
             out
             of
             the
             earth
             into
             heaued
             locally
             and
             visibly
             .
             Therefore
             his
             bodie
             is
             not
             to
             be
             receiued
             with
             the
             mouth
             at
             the
             Communion
             ,
             but
             by
             faith
             〈…〉
             prehending
             it
             in
             the
             heauen
             .
             2.
             
             
               Borne
               of
               the
               Uirgin
               marie
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             Therfore
             he
             had
             a
             true
             and
             naturall
             bodle
             ,
             being
             long
             ,
             broad
             ,
             thicke
             ,
             seated
             and
             circumscribed
             in
             some
             place
             .
             Whereby
             it
             appeareth
             that
             the
             bread
             in
             the
             Supper
             cannot
             bee
             properly
             his
             very
             bodie
             ,
             but
             only
             a
             signe
             or
             pledge
             thereof
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             this
             sense
             consenteth
             with
             the
             circumstances
             of
             the
             place
             propounded
             :
          
           
             1.
             
             
               He
               tooke
               ,
               he
               brake
               it
               .
            
             Here
             it
             is
             not
             likely
             that
             Christ
             sitting
             amongst
             his
             disciples
             did
             take
             and
             breake
             his
             owne
             bodie
             with
             his
             hands
             .
             Therefore
             the
             bread
             is
             no
             more
             then
             a
             signe
             and
             seale
             .
          
           
           
             2.
             
             
               Deliuered
               (
               or
               giuen
               )
               for
               you
               .
            
             The
             bread
             can
             in
             no
             wise
             be
             said
             to
             bee
             giuen
             for
             vs
             ,
             but
             the
             bodie
             of
             Christ
             :
             therefore
             the
             bread
             is
             not
             properly
             the
             bodie
             ,
             but
             symbolically
             or
             by
             way
             of
             signification
             .
          
           
             3.
             
             
               The
               Cup
               is
               the
               new
               Testament
               ,
            
             not
             properly
             ,
             but
             by
             a
             Metonymie
             :
             therefore
             nothing
             hindreth
             ,
             but
             that
             a
             Metonymie
             may
             be
             as
             well
             in
             these
             words
             ,
             
               This
               is
               my
               bodie
            
             .
          
           
             4.
             
             Christ
             himselfe
             did
             eate
             of
             the
             bread
             ;
             but
             he
             did
             not
             eate
             himself
             .
          
           
             5.
             
             
               Doe
               yee
               this
               in
               remembrance
               of
               me
               :
            
             therefore
             Christ
             is
             not
             corporallie
             present
             to
             the
             mouth
             ,
             but
             spiritually
             to
             the
             faith
             of
             the
             heart
             .
          
           
             6.
             
             
               Untill
               he
               come
            
             :
             therefore
             Christ
             is
             absent
             in
             his
             bodie
             .
          
           
             7.
             
             Christ
             said
             not
             ,
             
               Vnder
               the
               forme
               of
               bread
            
             ,
             or
             
               in
               the
               bread
            
             :
             but
             he
             said
             ,
             This
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             
               This
               bread
               is
               my
               bodie
            
             .
          
           
             Thirdly
             ,
             this
             sense
             accords
             with
             the
             nature
             of
             a
             sacrament
             :
             in
             which
             wee
             must
             make
             a
             proportion
             and
             resemblance
             betweene
             the
             signe
             and
             the
             thing
             signified
             :
             which
             here
             can
             bee
             none
             ,
             if
             the
             bread
             bee
             properly
             the
             bodie
             .
          
           
           
             Fourthly
             ,
             it
             agrees
             with
             like
             places
             .
          
           
             Gen.
             17.
             10.
             
             
               This
               is
               my
               couenant
               ,
               which
               yee
               shall
               keepe
               betwixt
               you
               and
               me
               —
               .11
               .
               Ye
               shall
               circumcise
               the
               fore-skin
               of
               your
               flesh
               ,
               and
               it
               shall
               be
               a
               signe
               of
               the
               couenant
               between
               me
               and
               you
               .
            
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             10.
             4.
             
             
               They
               dranke
               of
               the
               spirituall
               Rocke
               ,
               that
               followed
               them
               :
               and
               the
               Rocke
               was
               Christ.
               
            
          
           
             Rom.
             4.
             11.
             
             
               Hee
               receiued
               the
               signe
               of
               Circumcision
               ,
               which
               might
               seale
               the
               righteousnes
               of
               faith
               .
            
          
           
             Exod.
             12.
             1.
             
             
               The
               Lambe
               is
               the
               Lords
               Passeouer
               .
            
             Verse
             13.
             
             
               It
               is
               a
               signe
               of
               his
               passing
               ouer
               .
            
          
           
             Act.
             2.
             38.
             
             
               Be
               baptised
               for
               the
               remission
               of
               sinnes
               .
            
          
           
             Ioh.
             6.
             35.
             
             
               And
               Iesus
               said
               vnto
               them
               ,
               I
               am
               the
               bread
               of
               life
               :
               he
               that
               commeth
               vnto
               me
               shall
               not
               hunger
               ,
               and
               hee
               that
               beleeueth
               in
               me
               shall
               neuer
               thirst
               .
            
          
           
             1.
             
             Cor.
             10.
             16.
             
             
               The
               cup
               of
               blessing
               which
               wee
               blesse
               ,
               is
               it
               not
               the
               Communion
               of
               the
               bloud
               of
               Christ
               ?
               The
               bread
               which
               we
               break
               ,
               is
               it
               not
               the
               communion
               of
               the
               body
               of
               Christ
               ?
            
             that
             is
             ,
             a
             signe
             of
             the
             communion
             .
          
           
             Fiftly
             ,
             it
             agreeth
             with
             the
             lawes
             of
             Logique
             .
             
             For
             one
             disparate
             is
             not
             spoken
             or
             predicated
             of
             another
             but
             by
             a
             borrowed
             speech
             .
          
           
             Sixtly
             ,
             it
             is
             agreeable
             to
             the
             common
             custome
             of
             speaking
             .
             So
             we
             put
             the
             Fasces
             or
             bundle
             of
             rods
             (
             vsed
             to
             bee
             caried
             before
             Magistrates
             )
             for
             
               gouernement
               it selfe
            
             :
             the
             gowne
             we
             put
             for
             peace
             :
             and
             the
             
               laurell
               garland
            
             for
             a
             triumph
             :
             as
             in
             Tully
             ,
          
           
             
               Cedant
               armatogae
               ,
               concedat
               laurea
               linguae
               .
            
          
           
             Therefore
             this
             other
             sense
             is
             proper
             .
          
           
             Now
             from
             this
             fruitfull
             Rule
             doe
             arise
             many
             consectaries
             or
             conclusions
             necessarie
             for
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             the
             Scriptures
             .
          
           
             
               Consectary
               1.
               
               The
               supply
               of
               euery
               word
               ,
               which
               is
               wanting
               ,
               is
               fitting
               for
               the
               place
               propounded
               ,
               if
               it
               agree
               with
               the
               analogie
               (
               or
               squire
               )
               of
               faith
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               circumstances
               and
               words
               of
               the
               same
               place
               .
               
                 As
                 for
                 example
              
               :
            
             
               Ephes.
               3.
               1.
               
               
                 For
                 which
                 cause
                 ,
                 I
                 Paul
                 the
                 prisoner
                 of
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 for
                 you
                 Gentiles
                 .
              
               The
               sentence
               is
               defectiue
               :
               therefore
               a
               supply
               must
               be
               made
               .
               And
               let
               this
               bee
               the
               supplie
               
                 [
                 I
                 will
                 be
                 an
                 Embassadour
                 ]
                 for
                 you
                 Gentiles
                 .
              
               This
               is
               not
               fit
               ,
               because
               Paul
               was
               
               not
               an
               Embassadour
               for
               the
               Gentiles
               ,
               but
               for
               Christ.
               Let
               another
               bee
               giuen
               .
               
                 [
                 haue
                 boasted
                 ]
                 for
                 you
                 Gentiles
                 .
              
               But
               this
               seemeth
               to
               be
               something
               too
               bold
               ,
               neither
               is
               any
               such
               like
               speech
               to
               bee
               met
               with
               in
               any
               part
               of
               the
               scriptures
               .
               Therefore
               the
               sentence
               may
               be
               fitly
               supplied
               after
               this
               maner
               ;
               
                 For
                 which
                 cause
                 I
                 Paul
                 am
                 the
                 prisoner
                 of
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 for
                 you
                 Gentiles
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   The
                   same
                   may
                   be
                   said
                   of
                   the
                   rest
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     Defectiue
                     Speeches
                     .
                  
                   
                     Their
                     Supplie
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       Esay
                       1.
                       13.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     I
                     cannot
                     iniquity
                     .
                  
                   
                     I
                     cannot
                     (
                     beare
                     )
                     iniquitie
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     
                       Luk.
                       13.
                       9.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     And
                     if
                     it
                     beare
                     fruit
                     :
                     if
                     not
                     ,
                     then
                     after
                     thou
                     shalt
                     cut
                     it
                     downe
                     .
                  
                   
                     And
                     if
                     it
                     beare
                     fruit
                     (
                     thou
                     shalt
                     let
                     it
                     stand
                     )
                     :
                     if
                     not
                     ,
                     then
                     after
                     thou
                     shalt
                     cut
                     it
                     downe
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     
                       Exod.
                       4.
                       25.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Then
                     Zippora
                     took
                  
                   
                     Then
                     Zippora
                     took
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                     a
                     sharpe
                     ,
                     and
                     cut
                     away
                     the
                     foreskin
                     of
                     her
                     sonne
                     .
                  
                   
                     a
                     sharpe
                     (
                     knife
                     )
                     and
                     cut
                     ,
                     &c.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Sam.
                       21.
                       16.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     Isbi
                     Benod
                     ,
                     which
                     of
                     the
                     sonnes
                     of
                     a
                     certain
                     Giāt
                     ,
                     the
                     weight
                     of
                     whose
                     sword
                     the
                     weight
                     of
                     three
                     hundred
                     shickles
                     of
                     steele
                     :
                     and
                     he
                     girded
                     with
                     a
                     new
                     .
                  
                   
                     Isbi
                     Benod
                     ,
                     who
                     (
                     was
                     )
                     of
                     the
                     sonnes
                     of
                     a
                     certaine
                     Giant
                     ,
                     the
                     weight
                     of
                     whose
                     sword
                     (
                     or
                     speares
                     head
                     ,
                     mucronis
                     )
                     [
                     was
                     ]
                     the
                     weight
                     of
                     three
                     hundred
                     shiekles
                     ,
                     of
                     steele
                     ,
                     and
                     he
                     was
                     girded
                     with
                     a
                     new
                     sword
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     
                       1.
                       
                       Cor.
                       9.
                       25.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     And
                     euery
                     man
                     ,
                     that
                     prooueth
                     masteries
                     ,
                     is
                     continent
                     in
                     al
                     things
                     :
                     and
                     they
                     to
                     obtaine
                     a
                     corruptible
                     crowne
                     ,
                     but
                     we
                     for
                     an
                     vncorruptible
                     .
                  
                   
                     And
                     they
                     (
                     are
                     continent
                     )
                     to
                     obtaine
                     a
                     corruptible
                     crowne
                     ,
                     &c.
                     
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   
                     
                       Exod.
                       19.
                       4.
                       
                    
                  
                   
                      
                  
                
                 
                   
                     You
                     haue
                     seene
                     how
                  
                   
                     [
                     as
                     it
                     were
                     ]
                     vpon
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                     I
                     haue
                     carried
                     you
                     vpon
                     Eagles
                     wings
                     .
                  
                   
                     Eagles
                     wings
                     .
                  
                
              
            
          
           
             
               Consect
               .
               2.
               
               If
               that
               other
               exposition
               giuen
               of
               the
               place
               propounded
               doe
               change
               one
               nowne
               (
               or
               name
               )
               for
               another
               ,
               then
               the
               words
               of
               the
               place
               containe
               in
               them
               a
               trope
               ,
               or
               berowed
               speech
               .
            
             
               Hence
               arise
               many
               cautions
               concerning
               sacred
               tropes
               .
            
             
               1
               An
               Anthropo-pathia
               is
               a
               sacred
               Metaphor
               ,
               wherby
               those
               things
               ,
               that
               are
               properly
               spoken
               of
               man
               ,
               are
               by
               a
               similitude
               attributed
               vnto
               God.
               Hence
               it
               is
               that
               the
               soule
               of
               God
               is
               put
               for
               his
               life
               or
               essence
               .
               Ierem.
               5.
               29.
               
               
                 Or
                 shall
                 not
                 my
                 soule
                 be
                 auenged
                 of
                 such
                 a
                 nation
                 as
                 this
                 ?
              
               Head
               is
               vsed
               for
               prince
               ,
               or
               aboue
               .
               1.
               
               Cor.
               11.
               3.
               
               
                 God
                 is
                 the
                 head
                 of
                 Christ.
              
               His
               face
               is
               put
               for
               fauour
               or
               anger
               .
               Psal.
               30.
               7.
               
               
                 Thou
                 didst
                 hide
                 thy
                 face
                 ,
                 and
                 I
                 was
                 troubled
                 .
              
               Psal.
               34.
               16.
               
               
                 The
                 face
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 is
              
               *
               
                 angrie
                 at
                 those
                 that
                 doe
                 euill
                 .
              
               His
               eyes
               are
               vsed
               for
               grace
               and
               prouidence
               .
               Psal.
               34.
               15.
               
               
                 The
                 eyes
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 are
                 vpon
                 the
                 iust
                 .
              
               The
               apple
               of
               his
               eye
               signifieth
               a
               thing
               very
               deare
               .
               Zach.
               2.
               8.
               
               
                 He
                 
                 that
                 toucheth
                 you
                 ,
                 toucheth
                 the
                 apple
                 of
                 mine
                 eye
                 .
              
               His
               eares
               are
               put
               for
               his
               accepting
               of
               mens
               prayers
               .
               His
               nostrils
               for
               indignation
               .
               His
               hands
               for
               power
               and
               protectiō
               .
               His
               arme
               for
               strength
               and
               fortitude
               .
               His
               right
               hand
               for
               authoritie
               and
               power
               .
               His
               finger
               for
               vertue
               .
               His
               foote
               for
               gouernement
               and
               might
               .
               Psal.
               110.
               3.
               
               His
               smelling
               for
               his
               acceptation
               of
               something
               .
               Genes
               .
               8.
               21.
               
               
                 He
                 smelled
                 the
                 sauour
                 of
                 rest
                 .
              
               Repentance
               is
               vsed
               for
               the
               alteration
               of
               things
               and
               actions
               made
               by
               God.
               
            
             
               2
               A
               sacramentall
               Metonymie
               is
               that
               ,
               whereby
               the
               name
               of
               the
               adiunct
               ,
               as
               also
               of
               the
               helping
               cause
               is
               put
               for
               the
               thing
               represented
               in
               the
               Sacrament
               :
               or
               ,
               whereby
               the
               signe
               is
               put
               for
               the
               thing
               signified
               ,
               or
               contrarily
               .
               Genes
               .
               2.
               9.
               
               
                 The
                 tree
                 of
                 life
                 :
                 the
                 tree
                 of
                 the
                 knowledge
                 of
                 good
                 and
                 euill
              
               ;
               that
               is
               ,
               the
               tree
               which
               is
               a
               signe
               of
               these
               .
               Gen.
               22.
               14.
               
               Abraham
               called
               the
               name
               of
               that
               place
               ,
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 will
                 see
                 or
                 prouide
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               it
               is
               a
               signe
               that
               the
               Lord
               will
               doe
               so
               .
               Gen.
               28.
               22.
               
               The
               stone
               is
               called
               
                 Gods
                 house
              
               .
               Exod.
               12.
               
               The
               Paschall
               Lambe
               is
               the
               passing
               ouer
               .
               Exod.
               17.
               15.
               
               The
               Altar
               is
               called
               ,
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 is
                 my
              
               *
               
                 standard
                 or
                 banner
              
               .
               Ezek.
               
               48.
               35.
               
               Ierusalem
               is
               named
               ,
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 is
                 there
              
               .
               Leuit.
               16.
               
               The
               Priest
               is
               termed
               a
               satisfier
               .
               Ioh.
               1.
               
               Christ
               is
               called
               a
               Lambe
               :
               
                 Behold
                 the
                 Lambe
                 of
                 God
                 which
                 taketh
                 away
                 the
                 sinnes
                 of
                 the
                 world
                 .
              
               The
               Paschall
               Lambe
               is
               called
               Christ.
               1.
               
               Cor.
               5.
               7.
               
               
                 Our
                 Passeouer
                 Christ
                 is
                 sacrificed
                 for
                 vs.
              
               And
               in
               the
               same
               place
               Christians
               are
               said
               to
               bee
               vnleauened
               .
               Rom.
               3.
               25.
               
               Christ
               is
               termed
               the
               propitiatorie
               (
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               )
               or
               the
               couer
               of
               the
               Arke
               of
               the
               Couenant
               .
               1.
               
               Cor.
               10.
               
               Christians
               are
               said
               to
               be
               one
               *
               bread
               .
               And
               the
               Rocke
               is
               called
               Christ.
               Tit.
               3.
               5.
               
               Baptisme
               is
               named
               the
               
                 washing
                 of
                 the
                 new
                 birth
              
               .
               1.
               
               Cor.
               11.
               
               The
               Cup
               is
               called
               
                 the
                 new
                 Testament
              
               :
               and
               the
               bread
               is
               said
               to
               be
               the
               bodie
               of
               Christ.
               
            
             
               3
               The
               *
               communication
               of
               the
               properties
               is
               a
               Synecdoche
               ,
               by
               the
               which
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               personall
               vnion
               ,
               that
               is
               spoken
               of
               the
               whole
               person
               of
               Christ
               ,
               which
               doth
               properly
               belong
               to
               one
               of
               his
               two
               natures
               .
               Act.
               20.
               28.
               
               
                 To
                 feede
                 the
                 Church
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 which
                 he
                 hath
                 purchased
                 with
                 his
                 owne
                 blood
                 .
              
               Ioh.
               3.
               13.
               
               
                 For
                 no
                 man
                 ascendeth
                 vp
                 to
                 heauen
                 ,
                 but
                 he
                 that
                 hath
                 descended
                 from
                 heauen
                 ,
                 the
                 Sonne
                 of
                 man
                 which
                 is
                 in
                 heauen
                 .
              
               
               1.
               
               Cor.
               2.
               8.
               
               
                 For
                 had
                 they
                 knowne
                 it
                 ,
                 they
                 would
                 not
                 haue
                 crucified
                 the
                 Lord
                 of
                 glorie
                 .
              
               Ioh.
               8.
               58.
               
               
                 Iesus
                 said
                 vnto
                 them
                 ,
                 Uerily
                 ,
                 verily
                 I
                 say
                 vnto
                 you
                 ,
                 before
                 Abraham
                 was
                 I
                 am
                 .
              
               Luk.
               2.
               52.
               
               
                 And
                 Iesus
                 increased
                 in
                 wisedome
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 stature
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 fauour
                 with
                 God
                 and
                 man.
                 
              
            
             
               This
               communication
               of
               the
               properties
               hath
               place
               only
               in
               the
               concrete
               ,
               and
               not
               in
               the
               
                 abstract
                 .
                 Concrete
              
               is
               the
               name
               of
               the
               
                 whole
                 person
              
               ,
               as
               
                 God
                 ,
                 Man
                 ,
                 Christ
              
               ,
               &c.
               
               Abstract
               is
               a
               name
               of
               either
               of
               the
               
                 two
                 natures
              
               considered
               apart
               ,
               as
               the
               
                 Godhead
                 ,
                 Manhead
              
               &c.
               
            
             
               4
               Things
               spoken
               of
               God
               ,
               which
               carrie
               with
               them
               the
               shew
               of
               euill
               ,
               must
               be
               vnderstood
               in
               regard
               of
               his
               operatiue
               or
               working
               permission
               .
               Nehem.
               9.
               37.
               
               
                 And
                 it
                 yeeldeth
                 much
                 fruit
                 vnto
                 the
                 Kings
                 ,
                 whom
                 thou
                 hast
                 set
                 ouer
                 vs
                 because
                 of
                 our
                 sinnes
                 :
                 and
                 they
                 haue
                 dominion
                 ouer
                 our
                 bodies
                 ,
                 and
                 ouer
                 our
                 cattell
                 at
                 their
                 pleasure
                 ,
                 and
                 we
                 are
                 in
                 great
                 affliction
                 .
              
               Isa.
               19.
               14.
               
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 hath
                 mingled
                 among
                 them
                 the
                 spirit
                 of
                 errors
                 :
                 and
                 they
                 haue
                 caused
                 Aegypt
                 to
                 erre
                 in
                 euerie
                 worke
                 thereof
                 .
              
               Exod.
               4.
               and
               9.
               and
               11.
               and
               14.
               
               
                 God
                 doth
                 harden
                 the
                 heart
                 of
                 Pharaoh
                 .
              
               
               Deut.
               2.
               30.
               
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 thy
                 God
                 hath
                 hardened
                 his
                 spirit
                 ,
                 and
                 made
                 his
                 heart
                 obstinate
                 ,
                 because
                 hee
                 would
                 deliuer
                 him
                 into
                 thine
                 hand
                 ,
                 as
                 appeareth
                 this
                 day
                 .
              
               Iosh.
               11.
               20.
               
               
                 It
                 came
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 that
                 their
                 heart
                 was
                 hardened
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 might
                 come
                 against
                 Israel
                 in
                 battell
                 ,
                 to
                 the
                 intent
                 that
                 they
                 should
                 destroy
                 them
                 vtterly
                 ,
                 and
                 shew
                 them
                 no
                 mercie
                 ,
                 but
                 bring
                 them
                 to
                 nought
                 .
              
               1.
               
               Sam.
               2.
               25.
               
               
                 They
                 hearkened
                 not
                 to
                 the
                 voice
                 of
                 their
                 father
                 ,
                 because
                 the
                 Lord
                 meant
                 to
                 destroy
                 them
                 .
              
               2.
               
               Chron.
               22.
               7.
               
               
                 The
                 destruction
                 of
                 Ahaziah
                 came
                 from
                 God.
              
               Psal.
               105.
               25.
               
               
                 He
                 turned
                 their
                 heart
                 to
                 hate
                 his
                 people
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 worke
                 craftily
                 against
                 his
                 seruants
                 .
              
               Rom.
               1.
               28.
               
               
                 God
                 deliuered
                 them
                 vp
                 to
                 a
                 reprobate
                 minde
                 .
              
               2.
               
               Thess.
               2.
               11.
               
               
                 God
                 will
                 send
                 them
                 strong
                 delusions
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 beleeue
                 lies
                 .
              
               Ezek.
               14.
               9.
               
               
                 And
                 when
                 that
                 Prophet
                 shall
                 be
                 inticed
                 to
                 speake
                 a
                 prophecie
                 ,
                 I
                 the
                 Lord
                 will
                 intice
                 that
                 Prophet
                 ,
                 and
                 stretching
                 out
                 mine
                 hand
                 against
                 him
                 ,
                 I
                 will
                 destroy
                 him
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 middest
                 of
                 my
                 people
                 .
              
            
             
               5
               Things
               spoken
               
                 (
                 completiuè
              
               )
               as
               if
               they
               were
               alreadie
               finished
               ,
               if
               they
               be
               not
               as
               yet
               finished
               ,
               they
               are
               to
               be
               vnderstood
               
                 (
                 inchoatiuè
              
               )
               as
               being
               begun
               ,
               and
               in
               the
               
               way
               to
               be
               fulfilled
               .
               Gen.
               5.
               32.
               
               
                 And
                 when
                 Noah
                 was
                 fiue
                 hundred
                 yeeres
                 old
                 ,
                 hee
                 begot
                 Shem
                 ,
                 Ham
                 ,
                 and
                 Iapheth
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               he
               began
               to
               beget
               them
               .
               Genes
               .
               11.
               26.
               
               
                 Terah
                 liued
                 seuentie
                 yeeres
                 ,
                 when
                 he
                 begat
                 Abram
                 ,
                 Nahor
                 ,
                 and
                 Haran
                 .
              
               1.
               
               King.
               6.
               2.
               37.
               
               Psal.
               119.
               8.
               
               
                 I
                 will
                 obserue
                 thy
                 statutes
                 ,
                 do
                 not
                 forsake
                 me
                 .
              
               It
               is
               to
               be
               vnderstood
               of
               his
               endeuour
               to
               doe
               so
               ,
               as
               in
               Phil.
               3.
               
               
                 Not
                 as
                 though
                 I
                 had
                 alreadie
                 attained
                 to
                 it
                 ,
                 or
                 were
                 alreadie
                 perfect
                 :
                 but
                 I
                 follow
                 on
                 ,
                 if
                 that
                 I
                 may
                 comprehend
                 that
                 for
                 whose
                 sake
                 also
                 I
                 am
                 comprehended
                 of
                 Iesus
                 Christ.
              
               Vers.
               15.
               
               
                 Let
                 vs
                 therfore
                 as
                 many
                 as
                 bee
                 perfect
                 be
                 thus
                 minded
                 .
              
               Luk.
               1.
               6.
               
               
                 And
                 they
                 were
                 both
                 iust
                 in
                 the
                 sight
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 walking
                 in
                 all
                 his
                 commandements
                 and
                 ordinances
                 without
                 blame
                 .
              
            
             
               6
               Morall
               commandements
               or
               lawes
               vnder
               one
               sinne
               by
               name
               expressed
               ,
               doe
               signifie
               and
               meane
               all
               the
               sinnes
               of
               that
               kinde
               ,
               their
               causes
               ,
               occasions
               ,
               and
               allurements
               to
               them
               ,
               and
               command
               the
               contrarie
               vertues
               .
               For
               so
               Christ
               expounded
               morall
               lawes
               ,
               Matth.
               5.
               2.
               to
               the
               end
               of
               the
               chapter
               .
               1.
               
               Ioh.
               3.
               15.
               
               
                 Hee
                 that
                 hateth
                 his
                 brother
                 is
                 a
                 manslayer
                 .
              
            
             
               7
               Threats
               and
               promises
               are
               to
               be
               vnderstood
               
               with
               their
               conditions
               .
               Those
               are
               to
               bee
               conceiued
               with
               the
               condition
               of
               faith
               and
               repentance
               :
               and
               these
               ,
               specially
               if
               they
               bee
               corporall
               ,
               with
               the
               exception
               of
               chastisement
               and
               the
               crosse
               .
               Ezech.
               33.
               14.
               
               
                 When
                 I
                 shall
                 say
                 vnto
                 the
                 wicked
                 ,
                 Thou
                 shalt
                 die
                 the
                 death
                 :
                 if
                 he
                 turne
                 from
                 his
                 sin
                 ,
                 and
                 do
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 lawfull
                 &
                 right
                 ,
                 —
                 15.
                 he
                 shall
                 surely
                 liue
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 die
                 .
              
               Reuel
               .
               21.
               8.
               
               
                 But
                 the
                 fearfull
                 and
                 vnbeleeuers
                 &c.
                 shall
                 haue
                 their
                 portion
                 in
                 the
                 lake
                 ,
                 which
                 burneth
                 with
                 fire
                 and
                 brimstone
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 the
                 second
                 death
                 .
              
               But
               in
               the
               sixt
               verse
               hee
               annexeth
               a
               promise
               ,
               saying
               ,
               
                 I
                 will
                 giue
                 vnto
                 him
                 that
                 is
                 a
                 thirst
                 of
                 the
                 well
                 of
                 the
                 water
                 of
                 life
                 freely
                 .
              
               Ionah
               3.
               4.
               
               
                 Yet
                 fourtie
                 daies
                 ,
                 and
                 Nineue
                 shall
                 be
                 subuerted
                 .
              
               By
               those
               things
               which
               follow
               it
               appeareth
               that
               a
               condition
               is
               to
               be
               vnderstood
               .
               Ierem.
               18.
               19.
               
            
             
               Like
               to
               these
               there
               are
               particular
               examples
               .
               Esay
               38.
               1.
               of
               
                 Hezechiah
                 :
                 Giue
                 commaundements
                 to
                 thy
                 familie
                 ,
                 for
                 thou
                 shalt
                 shortly
                 die
                 ,
                 and
                 shalt
                 not
                 liue
                 .
              
               The
               condition
               of
               Gods
               will
               is
               to
               bee
               vnderstood
               .
               Gen.
               20.
               3.
               
               The
               Lord
               saith
               to
               Abimelech
               ,
               because
               hee
               had
               taken
               Abrahams
               wife
               to
               himselfe
               :
               
                 Behold
                 ,
                 thou
                 shalt
                 die
                 for
                 the
                 woman
                 
                 which
                 thou
                 hast
                 taken
              
               ;
               except
               ,
               
                 vnlesse
                 thou
                 restore
                 her
              
               .
            
             
               Hence
               arose
               y
               e
               distinction
               in
               the
               schooles
               of
               the
               *
               Signifying
               will
               ,
               and
               the
               will
               of
               Gods
               Good-pleasure
               .
               The
               wil
               of
               Good-pleasure
               is
               that
               ,
               whereby
               God
               doth
               will
               something
               absolutely
               and
               simply
               without
               any
               condition
               ,
               as
               the
               creation
               and
               regiment
               of
               the
               world
               ,
               and
               the
               sending
               of
               his
               Sonne
               .
               The
               Signifying
               will
               is
               that
               ,
               whereby
               he
               willeth
               somethings
               for
               some
               other
               thing
               and
               with
               condition
               :
               and
               so
               wee
               say
               ,
               because
               that
               the
               condition
               annexed
               is
               a
               signe
               of
               the
               will
               ,
               that
               God
               doth
               so
               will.
               
            
             
               8
               A
               superlatiue
               or
               exclusiue
               speech
               vsed
               of
               one
               person
               ,
               doth
               not
               exclude
               the
               other
               persons
               of
               the
               Deity
               ,
               but
               only
               creatures
               and
               fained
               gods
               :
               to
               which
               the
               true
               God
               ,
               whether
               in
               one
               person
               or
               in
               moe
               ,
               is
               opposed
               .
               Ioh.
               17.
               3.
               
               
                 This
                 is
                 life
                 eternall
                 to
                 know
                 thee
                 to
                 be
                 the
                 only
                 true
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 whom
                 thou
                 hast
                 sent
                 .
              
               He
               calleth
               the
               Father
               the
               onely
               true
               God
               ,
               that
               he
               might
               oppose
               him
               to
               all
               false
               gods
               .
               Rom.
               16.
               27.
               
               
                 To
                 the
                 onely
                 wise
                 God
                 bee
                 glorie
                 by
                 Iesus
                 Christ.
              
               1.
               
               Tim.
               1.
               17.
               
               Ioh.
               10.
               29.
               
               
                 The
                 Father
              
               
               
                 is
                 greater
                 than
                 all
              
               :
               not
               than
               the
               rest
               of
               the
               persons
               ,
               but
               than
               the
               creatures
               .
               Mark.
               13.
               37.
               
               
                 The
                 Father
                 alone
                 knoweth
                 the
                 day
                 of
                 iudgement
                 .
              
               All
               the
               outward
               works
               of
               the
               Trinitie
               ,
               and
               all
               attributes
               are
               to
               be
               vnderstood
               inclusiuely
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               without
               exception
               of
               any
               of
               the
               persons
               .
            
             
               9
               When
               God
               is
               considered
               absolutely
               ,
               or
               by
               himselfe
               ,
               the
               three
               persons
               are
               comprehended
               :
               when
               the
               word
               (
               God
               )
               is
               conferred
               or
               set
               with
               a
               person
               of
               the
               Trinitie
               ,
               it
               signifieth
               the
               Father
               .
               2.
               
               Cor.
               13.
               13.
               
               
                 The
                 grace
                 of
                 our
                 Lord
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 loue
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 fellowship
                 of
                 the
                 Holie
                 Ghost
                 be
                 with
                 you
                 all
                 .
              
            
             
               10
               A
               generall
               word
               is
               taken
               specially
               ,
               and
               so
               on
               the
               contraric
               ;
               as
               All
               (
               saith
               
                 August
                 .
                 lib.
                 6.
                 cont
                 .
                 Iulian
                 cap.
              
               12.
               )
               for
               Many
               ,
               and
               Many
               for
               All
               are
               oftentimes
               vsed
               in
               the
               Scriptures
               .
               Gen.
               33.
               11.
               
               
                 God
                 hath
                 had
                 mercie
                 on
                 nice
                 ,
                 therefore
                 I
                 haue
                 all
                 things
                 .
              
               Iere.
               8.
               6.
               
               
                 All
                 are
                 turned
                 to
                 their
                 owne
                 race
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 the
                 greater
                 part
                 .
              
               Matth.
               21.
               26.
               
               
                 All
                 men
                 counted
                 Iohn
                 as
                 a
                 Prophet
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               the
               most
               .
               Phil.
               2.
               21.
               
               
                 All
                 seeke
                 their
                 own
                 things
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 the
                 things
                 of
                 Christ.
              
               Deut.
               28.
               64.
               
               
                 And
                 God
                 shall
                 scatter
                 thee
                 among
                 all
                 people
                 ,
              
               
               that
               is
               ,
               many
               .
               1.
               
               King.
               12.
               18.
               
               
                 And
                 all
                 the
                 Israelites
                 stoned
                 him
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               all
               that
               were
               present
               .
               Exod.
               9.
               6.
               
               
                 All
                 the
                 liuing
                 creatures
                 of
                 Aegypt
                 died
                 .
              
               Ierem.
               26.
               9.
               
               
                 Then
                 was
                 gathered
                 together
                 all
                 the
                 people
                 against
                 Ieremie
                 in
                 the
                 house
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               
                 all
                 wicked
                 people
              
               .
               Matth.
               4.
               23.
               
               
                 Healing
                 euery
                 disease
              
               ,
               to
               wit
               ,
               that
               was
               offered
               to
               him
               .
               Iohn
               14.
               13.
               
               
                 Whatsoeuer
                 yee
                 shall
                 aske
                 the
                 Father
                 in
                 my
                 name
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               whatsoeuer
               yee
               shall
               aske
               according
               to
               his
               word
               .
               1.
               
               Cor.
               6.
               12.
               
               
                 All
                 things
                 are
                 lawfull
                 for
                 mee
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               all
               
                 (
                 adiaphora
              
               )
               things
               that
               are
               indifferent
               and
               not
               simply
               euill
               .
            
             
               Nothing
               is
               put
               for
               little
               or
               small
               .
               Ioh.
               18.
               20.
               
               
                 I
                 haue
                 spoken
                 nothing
                 in
                 secret
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               little
               .
               Act.
               27.
               33.
               
            
             
               None
               is
               vsed
               for
               few
               .
               Ierem.
               8.
               6.
               
               
                 There
                 is
                 none
                 that
                 repenteth
                 of
                 his
                 wickednes
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               but
               a
               few
               .
               1.
               
               Cor.
               2.
               8.
               
               
                 Which
                 wisedome
                 none
                 of
                 the
                 Rulers
                 of
                 this
                 world
                 knew
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               
                 very
                 few
              
               .
            
             
               Alwaies
               is
               taken
               for
               often
               or
               long
               .
               Prou.
               13.
               10.
               
               
                 Amongst
                 the
                 proud
                 there
                 is
                 alwaies
                 contentions
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               often
               .
               Luk.
               18.
               1.
               
               
                 Hee
                 spake
                 vnto
                 them
                 a
                 parable
                 that
                 they
                 ought
                 to
                 pray
                 alway
                 .
              
               Luk.
               24.
               53.
               
               
                 And
                 they
                 were
                 alwaies
                 
                 in
                 the
                 Temple
                 lauding
                 and
                 praising
                 of
                 God.
              
               Ioh.
               18.
               20.
               
               
                 I
                 alway
                 taught
                 in
                 the
                 Synagogue
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 Temple
                 .
              
            
             
               Eternall
               is
               vsed
               for
               a
               
                 long
                 time
              
               agreeing
               with
               the
               matter
               in
               hand
               .
               Gen.
               17.
               8.
               
               
                 All
                 the
                 land
                 of
                 Canaan
                 is
                 giuen
                 vnto
                 Abraham
                 for
                 an
                 euerlasting
                 possession
                 .
              
               Leuit.
               25.
               46.
               
               
                 Ye
                 shall
                 vse
                 their
                 labours
                 for
                 euer
                 .
              
               Deut.
               15.
               17.
               
               
                 If
                 thy
                 seruant
                 be
                 thy
                 brother
                 an
                 Hebrew
                 ,
                 and
                 will
                 not
                 goe
                 from
                 thee
                 ,
                 then
                 shalt
                 thou
                 take
                 an
                 aule
                 ,
                 and
                 pierce
                 his
                 care
                 thorough
                 against
                 the
                 doore
                 ,
                 and
                 he
                 shall
                 be
                 thy
                 seruant
                 for
                 euer
                 ,
                 in
                 aeternum
                 .
              
               1.
               
               Chron.
               15.
               2.
               
               
                 God
                 hath
                 chosen
                 the
                 Leuites
                 ,
                 that
                 they
                 might
                 minister
                 for
                 euer
                 vnto
                 him
                 .
              
               Esay
               34.
               6.
               
               
                 And
                 beasts
                 shall
                 possesse
                 Idumea
                 and
                 Bozra
                 eternally
                 .
              
               Dan.
               2.
               4.
               
               
                 O
                 King
                 liue
                 for
                 euer
              
               .
               Ierem.
               25.
               9.
               
               
                 I
                 will
                 make
                 Iudea
                 and
                 the
                 regions
                 bordering
                 vpon
                 it
                 an
                 amazement
                 ,
                 a
                 hissing
                 ,
                 and
                 a
                 perpetuall
                 desolation
                 .
              
            
             
               *
               
                 Euery
                 where
              
               is
               vsed
               for
               
                 Here
                 and
                 there
                 ,
                 without
                 respect
                 of
                 place
                 .
              
               Mark.
               16.
               2.
               
               
                 And
                 they
                 went
                 out
                 and
                 preached
                 euery
                 where
                 the
                 Lord
                 co-working
                 .
              
               Act.
               17.
               30.
               
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 admonisheth
                 all
                 men
                 euery
                 where
                 to
                 repent
                 .
              
            
             
               [
               *
               Not
               ]
               is
               restrained
               to
               some
               speciall
               matter
               .
               Psalm
               .
               7.
               4.
               
               
                 Iniquitie
                 is
                 not
                 in
                 mine
                 
                 hands
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               
                 in
                 my
                 cause
              
               against
               the
               complices
               of
               Saul
               .
               Ioh.
               17.
               13.
               
               
                 Neither
                 haue
                 his
                 parents
                 sinned
              
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               that
               this
               man
               should
               be
               borne
               blind
               for
               their
               sinnes
               :
               
                 I
                 will
                 haue
                 mercie
                 ,
                 not
                 sacrifice
                 .
                 Not
              
               is
               put
               for
               
                 seldome
                 ,
                 scarsely
                 ,
                 or
                 hardly
                 .
              
               1.
               
               King.
               15.
               5.
               
               
                 Dauid
                 declined
                 not
                 from
                 any
                 of
                 the
                 things
                 which
                 the
                 Lord
                 had
                 commanded
                 vnto
                 him
                 ,
                 sauing
                 in
                 the
                 matter
                 of
                 Vriah
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               seldome
               .
               Luk.
               2.
               37.
               
               
                 She
                 was
                 a
                 widow
                 ,
                 and
                 went
                 not
                 out
                 of
                 the
                 Temple
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Consect
               .
               3.
               
               Grammaticall
               and
               Rhetoricall
               proprieties
               of
               words
               signifie
               diuersly
               with
               those
               words
               :
               As
               ,
            
             
               An
               *
               Ellipsis
               signifieth
               either
               breuitie
               ,
               or
               the
               swiftnes
               of
               the
               affectiōs
               .
               Gen.
               11.
               4.
               
               
                 Let
                 vs
                 build
                 vs
                 a
                 citie
                 and
                 a
                 tower
                 ,
                 whose
                 top
                 [
                 may
                 reach
                 ]
                 vnto
                 heauen
                 ,
                 that
                 wee
                 may
                 get
                 vs
                 a
                 name
                 .
              
               Act.
               5.
               39.
               
               
                 But
                 if
                 it
                 bee
                 of
                 God
                 yee
                 cannot
                 destroy
                 it
                 ,
                 [
                 ac
                 nescio
                 ,
                 and
                 I
                 know
                 not
                 ]
                 whether
                 ye
                 shall
                 be
                 found
                 fighters
                 also
                 with
                 God.
              
               Psalm
               .
               6.
               
               
                 And
                 thou
                 O
                 Lord
                 how
                 long
                 ?
              
               Exod.
               22.
               20.
               
               
                 He
                 that
                 sacrificeth
                 to
                 strange
                 gods
                 ,
                 let
                 him
                 bee
                 destroyed
                 as
                 a
                 thing
                 execrable
                 :
                 sauing
                 him
                 [
                 who
                 sacrificeth
                 ]
              
               
               
                 to
                 Iehouah
              
               .
               Genes
               .
               3.
               22.
               
               
                 Now
                 therefore
                 [
                 we
                 must
                 looke
                 ]
                 lest
                 that
                 stretching
                 out
                 his
                 hand
                 ,
                 he
                 take
                 of
                 the
                 tree
                 of
                 life
                 .
              
               1.
               
               Chron.
               4.
               10.
               
               
                 If
                 thou
                 wilt
                 blesse
                 me
                 effectually
                 [
                 I
                 will
                 doe
                 this
                 or
                 that
                 ]
                 If
                 thou
                 vexe
                 the
                 fatherlesse
                 child
                 [
                 I
                 will
                 vexe
                 thee
                 ]
                 .
              
            
             
               The
               Enallage
               of
               the
               preter
               perfect
               tense
               ,
               whereby
               the
               time
               past
               is
               put
               for
               the
               time
               to
               come
               ,
               signifieth
               in
               the
               oracles
               of
               the
               Prophets
               the
               certentie
               of
               the
               thing
               that
               is
               to
               come
               .
               Gen.
               20.
               3.
               
               
                 Thou
                 hast
                 died
                 because
                 of
                 the
                 woman
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               
                 thou
                 shalt
                 die
              
               .
               Isai.
               9.
               6.
               
               
                 Vnto
                 vs
                 a
                 child
                 is
                 borne
                 ,
                 vnto
                 vs
                 a
                 sonne
                 is
                 giuen
                 .
              
               Isa.
               21.
               9.
               
               
                 It
                 is
                 fallen
                 ,
                 it
                 is
                 fallen
                 Babylon
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
            
             
               A
               *
               Pleonasme
               ,
               which
               is
               manifold
               ,
               when
               it
               is
               of
               the
               substantiue
               repeated
               in
               the
               same
               case
               ,
               it
               doth
               signifie
               ,
               1.
               
               A
               force
               and
               *
               emphasis
               .
               Psalm
               .
               133.
               2.
               
               
                 As
                 the
                 ointment
                 which
                 descended
                 vnto
                 the
                 beard
                 ,
                 The
                 beard
                 of
                 Aaron
                 .
              
               Luk.
               6.
               46.
               
               
                 Why
                 call
                 ye
                 me
                 Lord
                 ,
                 Lord
                 ?
              
               2.
               
               A
               multitude
               .
               Gen.
               32.
               16.
               
               
                 Hee
                 gaue
                 into
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 his
                 seruants
                 droues
                 ,
                 droues
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               many
               droues
               .
               Ioel.
               3.
               
               
                 Troupes
                 ,
                 troupes
                 in
                 the
                 vally
                 of
                 concision
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               many
               troupes
               or
               multitudes
               .
               3.
               
               Distribution
               ,
               
                 At
                 the
                 gate
                 and
                 gate
              
               ,
               
               1.
               
               Chr.
               16.
               that
               is
               ,
               in
               euery
               gate
               .
               Leuit.
               17.
               3.
               
               
                 A
                 man
                 &
                 a
                 man
              
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               euery
               man.
               2.
               
               Chr.
               19.
               5.
               
               
                 Thou
                 shalt
                 appoint
                 Iudges
                 in
                 a
                 citie
                 and
                 in
                 a
                 citie
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               in
               euery
               citie
               .
               4.
               
               Diuersitie
               and
               varietie
               .
               Psalm
               .
               12.
               
               
                 They
                 speake
                 with
                 an
                 heart
                 ,
                 and
                 an
                 heart
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               with
               diuers
               or
               a
               double
               heart
               ,
               Prou.
               20.
               20.
               
               
                 A
                 weight
                 and
                 a
                 weight
                 are
                 abominable
                 vnto
                 the
                 Lord.
                 
              
            
             
               There
               is
               a
               Pleonasme
               of
               the
               Substantiue
               when
               one
               is
               gouerned
               of
               another
               .
               1.
               
               In
               the
               singular
               number
               it
               is
               very
               significant
               and
               argues
               certentie
               .
               Exod.
               31.
               15.
               
               
                 One
                 the
                 seuenth
                 day
                 is
                 the
                 Sabbath
                 of
                 Sabbath
                 .
              
               Mich.
               2.
               4.
               
               
                 And
                 they
                 shall
                 lament
                 the
                 lamentation
                 of
                 lamentation
                 .
              
               2.
               
               In
               the
               plurall
               number
               it
               signifieth
               Excellencie
               .
               Psal.
               136.
               2.
               
               
                 The
                 God
                 of
                 Gods
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 the
                 most
                 high
                 God.
              
               Dan.
               3.
               
               
                 The
                 King
                 of
                 Kings
              
               .
               Eccles.
               1.
               2.
               
               
                 Vanitie
                 of
                 vanities
                 .
                 A
                 Song
                 of
                 Songs
                 .
                 A
                 Seruant
                 of
                 Seruants
                 .
              
            
             
               The
               Pleonasme
               of
               the
               Adiectiue
               ,
               and
               sometimes
               also
               of
               the
               Substantiue
               repeated
               ,
               signifieth
               exaggeration
               or
               increasing
               .
               Ierem.
               24.
               3.
               
               
                 I
                 see
                 good
                 figges
                 ,
                 good
                 .
              
               Esay
               6.
               3.
               
               
                 Holy
                 ,
                 holy
                 ,
                 holy
                 the
                 Lord
                 God
                 of
                 hosts
                 .
              
               Exod.
               34.
               6.
               
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 passing
                 before
                 his
                 
                 face
                 cried
                 ,
                 Iehouah
                 ,
                 Iehouah
                 ,
                 the
                 strong
                 God.
              
               Ier.
               7.
               4.
               
               
                 Trust
                 not
                 in
                 lying
                 words
                 saying
                 ,
                 the
                 temple
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 the
                 temple
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 this
                 is
                 the
                 temple
                 of
                 the
                 Lord.
              
               Ier.
               22.
               29.
               
               
                 O
                 earth
                 ,
                 earth
                 ,
                 earth
                 ,
                 heare
                 the
                 word
                 of
                 the
                 Lord.
              
               Ezek.
               21.
               28.
               
               
                 Say
                 thou
                 the
                 Sword
                 ,
                 the
                 sword
                 is
                 drawne
                 ,
                 and
                 furbished
                 for
                 the
                 slaughter
                 .
              
               Prou.
               6.
               10.
               
            
             
               The
               Pleonasme
               of
               the
               Verbe
               doth
               either
               make
               the
               speech
               more
               emphaticall
               and
               significant
               ,
               or
               else
               signifieth
               and
               sheweth
               vehemencie
               ,
               or
               certentie
               ,
               or
               speedines
               .
               Gen.
               2.
               17.
               
               
                 In
                 dying
                 thou
                 shalt
                 die
              
               .
               Esay
               .
               50.
               2.
               
               
                 Is
                 mine
                 hand
                 shortned
                 in
                 shortening
                 ?
              
               Esay
               .
               56.
               3.
               
               
                 By
                 separating
                 God
                 hath
                 separated
                 me
                 from
                 his
                 people
                 .
              
               Psalm
               .
               50.
               21.
               
               
                 Thou
                 thinkest
                 me
                 by
                 being
                 to
                 bee
                 like
                 thee
                 .
              
               Psalm
               .
               109.
               10.
               
               
                 Let
                 his
                 children
                 in
                 wandering
                 be
                 wanderers
                 (
                 or
                 vagabonds
                 )
                 and
                 let
                 them
                 beg
                 .
              
               Iere.
               12.
               16.
               
               
                 And
                 it
                 shall
                 come
                 to
                 passe
                 if
                 in
                 learning
                 they
                 shall
                 learne
                 the
                 waies
                 of
                 my
                 people
                 .
                 &c.
              
               2.
               
               King.
               8.
               10.
               
               Prou.
               27.
               23.
               
               Exod.
               13.
               17.
               
               Isai.
               6.
               9.
               
               Isai.
               55.
               2.
               2.
               
               King.
               5.
               11.
               
               Genes
               .
               46.
               4.
               2.
               
               Sam.
               15.
               30.
               
               Ierem.
               23.
               29.
               
            
             
               The
               Pleonasme
               of
               the
               Coniunction
               sometimes
               argueth
               earnestnes
               .
               Ezek.
               13.
               10.
               
               
               
                 Therefore
                 ,
                 therefore
                 because
                 they
                 haue
                 made
                 my
                 people
                 to
                 erre
                 .
              
            
             
               Wherefore
               a
               *
               Coniunction
               doubled
               (
               otherwise
               than
               it
               is
               in
               Latine
               )
               increaseth
               the
               deniall
               .
               Exodus
               14.
               11.
               
               
                 Hast
                 thou
                 brought
                 vs
                 to
                 die
                 in
                 the
                 wildernes
                 ,
                 is
                 it
                 because
                 therewere
                 No
                 No
                 graues
                 in
                 Aegypt
                 ?
              
               that
               is
               ,
               
                 None
                 at
                 all
              
               ?
               Matth.
               13.
               14.
               
               
                 By
                 seeing
                 ye
                 shall
                 see
                 and
                 shall
                 Not
                 Not
              
               (
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               )
               perceiue
               .
            
             
               The
               Pleonasme
               of
               the
               sentence
               signifieth
               first
               ,
               distribution
               .
               
                 A
                 court
                 was
                 in
                 the
                 corner
                 of
                 the
                 court
                 :
                 a
                 court
                 was
                 in
                 the
                 corner
                 of
                 the
                 court
                 :
                 a
                 court
                 was
                 in
                 the
                 corner
                 of
                 the
                 court
              
               ;
               that
               is
               ,
               
                 in
                 euery
                 corner
                 of
                 the
                 court
                 there
                 was
                 one
                 court
                 .
              
               Secondlie
               ,
               it
               makes
               an
               emphasis
               .
               Exod.
               12.
               50.
               
               
                 The
                 Israelites
                 did
                 as
                 Moses
                 and
                 Aron
                 commanded
                 ,
                 so
                 did
                 they
                 .
              
               Psalm
               .
               145.
               18.
               
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 is
                 neere
                 vnto
                 all
                 that
                 call
                 vpon
                 him
                 :
                 to
                 all
                 that
                 call
                 vpon
                 him
                 in
                 trueth
                 .
              
               Psalm
               .
               124.
               1
               ,
               
                 Vnlesse
                 the
                 Lord
                 had
                 been
                 on
                 our
                 side
                 may
                 Israel
                 now
                 say
                 :
                 vnlesse
                 the
                 Lord
                 had
                 been
                 on
                 our
                 side
                 .
              
               Thirdly
               ,
               the
               repetition
               of
               the
               sentence
               ,
               which
               is
               done
               in
               other
               words
               ,
               is
               for
               exposition
               sake
               .
               2.
               
               King.
               20.
               3.
               
               
                 I
                 beseech
                 thee
                 ,
                 O
                 Lord
                 ,
                 remember
                 now
                 how
                 I
                 
                 haue
                 walked
                 before
                 thee
                 in
                 trueth
                 and
                 with
                 a
                 perfect
                 heart
                 ,
                 and
                 haue
                 done
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 good
                 in
                 thy
                 sight
                 ,
              
               Psalm
               .
               6.
               9.
               10.
               
               
                 The
                 Lord
                 hath
                 heard
                 the
                 voyce
                 of
                 my
                 weeping
                 ,
                 the
                 Lord
                 hath
                 heard
                 my
                 prayer
                 :
                 the
                 Lord
                 hath
                 receiued
                 my
                 supplication
                 .
              
               Esay
               3.
               9.
               
               
                 They
                 haue
                 declared
                 their
                 sinne
                 ,
                 and
                 haue
                 not
                 hidden
                 it
                 .
              
               Iohn
               1.
               3.
               
               
                 All
                 things
                 were
                 made
                 by
                 him
                 ,
                 and
                 without
                 him
                 nothing
                 was
                 made
                 .
              
            
             
               All
               tropes
               are
               *
               emphaticall
               ,
               &
               besides
               delight
               and
               ornament
               they
               doe
               also
               afford
               matter
               for
               the
               nourishment
               of
               faith
               :
               as
               when
               Christ
               is
               put
               for
               a
               
                 Christian
                 man
              
               ,
               or
               for
               the
               Church
               of
               God.
               Mat.
               25.
               35.
               1.
               
               Cor.
               12.
               
               
                 As
                 the
                 bodie
                 is
                 one
                 ,
                 and
                 hath
                 many
                 members
                 :
                 and
                 all
                 the
                 members
                 of
                 one
                 bodie
                 ,
                 though
                 they
                 bee
                 many
                 ,
                 are
                 yet
                 but
                 one
                 bodie
                 :
                 so
                 also
                 Christ
                 ,
              
               that
               is
               ,
               
                 The
                 Church
              
               .
               Act.
               9.
               4.
               
               This
               trope
               doth
               comfort
               a
               faithfull
               soule
               ,
               and
               nourish
               saith
               .
            
             
               An
               *
               Ironie
               signifieth
               a
               iust
               reprehension
               of
               sinne
               .
               Iudg.
               10.
               14.
               
               
                 And
                 the
                 Lord
                 said
                 to
                 the
                 children
                 of
                 Israel
                 :
                 Goe
                 ye
                 ,
                 and
                 crie
                 out
                 to
                 your
                 gods
                 ,
                 whom
                 yee
                 haue
                 chosen
                 :
                 let
                 them
                 saue
                 you
                 in
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 trouble
                 .
              
               Mark.
               7.
               9.
               
               
                 And
                 hee
                 said
                 vnto
                 them
                 ,
                 Well
                 ye
                 abrogate
                 the
                 commandement
                 of
                 God
                 ,
              
               
               
                 and
                 obserue
                 your
                 owne
                 traditions
              
               .
               1.
               
               King.
               22.
               15.
               
               
                 The
                 king
                 said
                 vnto
                 him
                 ,
                 Michaiah
                 ,
                 shall
                 we
                 goe
                 against
                 Ramoth
                 Gilead
                 to
                 battell
                 ?
                 or
                 shall
                 we
                 not
                 ?
                 and
                 he
                 answered
                 ,
                 Go
                 vp
                 and
                 prosper
                 :
                 doubtlesse
                 the
                 Lord
                 shall
                 deliuer
                 it
                 into
                 the
                 hand
                 of
                 the
                 King.
              
               1.
               
               King.
               18.
               27.
               
               
                 And
                 at
                 noone
                 Elijah
                 mocked
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 said
                 ,
                 Crie
                 aloud
                 ,
                 for
                 he
                 is
                 a
                 God
                 :
                 either
                 he
                 talketh
                 ,
                 or
                 pursueth
                 his
                 enemies
                 ,
                 or
                 is
                 in
                 his
                 iourney
                 :
                 or
                 it
                 may
                 bee
                 hee
                 sleepeth
                 ,
                 and
                 must
                 bee
                 awaked
                 .
              
               1.
               
               Cor.
               4.
               8.
               
               
                 Now
                 are
                 yee
                 full
                 ,
                 now
                 are
                 ye
                 enriched
                 ,
                 without
                 vs
                 yee
                 haue
                 gotten
                 a
                 kingdome
                 .
              
            
             
               Figures
               of
               a
               word
               in
               the
               repetition
               of
               a
               word
               or
               sound
               ,
               haue
               for
               the
               most
               part
               an
               emphasis
               in
               them
               .
               Psalm
               .
               66.
               7.
               
               
                 Let
                 God
                 ,
                 euen
                 our
                 God
                 blesse
                 vs.
              
               Isai.
               48.
               11.
               
               
                 For
                 mine
                 owne
                 sake
                 ,
                 for
                 mine
                 owne
                 sake
                 will
                 I
                 doe
                 it
                 .
              
               Iohn
               1.
               51.
               
               
                 Uerilie
                 ,
                 verilie
                 I
                 say
                 vnto
                 you
                 .
              
               Psalm
               .
               67.
               6.
               
               
                 The
                 people
                 shall
                 prayse
                 thee
                 ,
                 O
                 God
                 ;
                 all
                 the
                 people
                 shall
                 praise
                 thee
                 .
              
               In
               the
               136.
               
               Psal.
               there
               is
               a
               repetition
               made
               in
               euerie
               verse
               for
               this
               cause
               .
            
             
               An
               Interrogation
               signifieth
               ,
               1.
               an
               earnest
               affirmation
               ,
               or
               asseucration
               .
               Gen.
               4.
               7.
               
               
                 Is
                 there
                 not
                 remission
                 ,
                 if
                 thou
                 shalt
                 doe
                 well
                 ?
              
               Iosh.
               10.
               13.
               
               
                 Is
                 not
                 this
                 written
                 in
                 the
                 booke
                 
                 of
                 the
                 iust
                 ?
              
               Iohn
               .
               4.
               35.
               
               
                 Doe
                 ye
                 not
                 say
                 that
                 it
                 is
                 yet
                 foure
                 moneths
                 to
                 haruest
                 ?
              
               Iosh.
               1.
               9.
               
               Gen.
               37.
               13.
               1.
               
               King.
               20.
               27.
               
               Mark.
               12.
               24.
               
               Iohn
               6.
               7.
               
               Secondly
               ,
               it
               signifieth
               a
               deniall
               :
               Gen.
               18.
               4.
               
               
                 Shall
                 any
                 word
                 bee
                 hard
                 vnto
                 God
                 ?
              
               Rom.
               3.
               3.
               
               
                 Shal
                 their
                 incredulity
                 make
                 the
                 faith
                 of
                 God
                 of
                 none
                 effect
                 ?
              
               Mat.
               12.
               26.
               
               
                 If
                 Satan
                 shall
                 vanquish
                 Satan
                 ,
                 how
                 shall
                 his
                 kingdome
                 continue
                 ?
              
               3.
               
               It
               signifies
               a
               forbidding
               .
               Psal.
               79.
               10.
               
               
                 Helpe
                 vs
                 ,
                 O
                 God
                 ,
                 why
                 shall
                 the
                 Gentiles
                 say
                 ,
                 where
                 is
                 their
                 God
                 ?
              
               2.
               
               Sam.
               2.
               22.
               
               
                 And
                 Abner
                 said
                 to
                 Asahel
                 ,
                 depart
                 from
                 me
                 :
                 wherefore
                 should
                 I
                 smite
                 thee
                 to
                 the
                 ground
                 ?
              
               4.
               
               It
               argueth
               sundrie
               affections
               ,
               as
               admiration
               ,
               compassion
               ,
               complaining
               ,
               and
               finding
               of
               fault
               .
               Psalm
               .
               8.
               10.
               
               
                 O
                 Lord
                 ,
                 how
                 admirable
                 is
                 thy
                 name
                 in
                 all
                 the
                 earth
                 !
              
               Isai.
               1.
               21.
               
               
                 How
                 is
                 the
                 faithfull
                 citie
                 become
                 an
                 Harlot
                 !
              
               Psalm
               .
               22.
               
               
                 My
                 GOD
                 ,
                 my
                 GOD
                 ,
                 why
                 hast
                 thou
                 forsaken
                 me
                 ?
              
            
             
               Concession
               (
               or
               yeelding
               )
               signifieth
               a
               deniall
               and
               reprehension
               .
               2.
               
               Cor.
               12.
               16.
               
               
                 But
                 bee
                 it
                 ,
                 that
                 I
                 charged
                 you
                 not
                 ,
                 but
                 because
                 I
                 was
                 craftie
                 ,
                 I
                 tooke
                 you
                 with
                 guile
                 .
                 17.
                 
                 Did
                 I
                 pill
                 you
                 by
                 any
                 of
                 them
                 ,
                 whom
                 I
                 sent
                 ?
              
            
          
           
             
             
               Consect
               .
               4.
               
               If
               the
               Opposition
               of
               vnlike
               places
               shal
               be
               taught
               to
               be
               ,
               either
               not
               of
               the
               same
               matter
               ,
               but
               of
               name
               onely
               ,
               or
               not
               according
               to
               the
               same
               part
               ,
               or
               not
               in
               the
               same
               respect
               ,
               or
               not
               in
               the
               same
               manner
               ,
               or
               not
               at
               the
               same
               time
               ,
               a
               reconciliation
               or
               agreement
               is
               made
               .
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     Examples
                     .
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         Psalm
                         .
                         7.
                         8.
                         
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         Esay
                         64.
                         6.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       Iudge
                       me
                       ,
                       O
                       Lord
                       ,
                       according
                       to
                       my
                       righteousnesse
                       .
                    
                     
                       Wee
                       haue
                       all
                       been
                       as
                       an
                       vncleane
                       thing
                       ,
                       and
                       all
                       our
                       righteousnes
                       is
                       as
                       filthie
                       clouts
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 Reconcilation
                 .
              
               
                 It
                 appeareth
                 by
                 the
                 scope
                 and
                 circumstances
                 of
                 both
                 the
                 places
                 ,
                 that
                 this
                 contradiction
                 is
                 not
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 respect
                 .
                 Distinguish
                 therefore
                 .
                 There
                 is
                 one
                 righteousnes
                 of
                 the
                 cause
                 or
                 action
                 :
                 and
                 an
                 other
                 of
                 the
                 person
                 ;
                 the
                 first
                 place
                 speaketh
                 of
                 the
                 former
                 :
                 and
                 the
                 second
                 of
                 the
                 latter
                 .
              
            
             
             
             
             
             
               
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         Mat.
                         10.
                         10.
                         
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         Mark.
                         68.
                         9.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         Nor
                         a
                         scrip
                         for
                         the
                         iourney
                         ,
                         neither
                         two
                         coates
                         ,
                         neither
                         shooes
                         ,
                         nor
                         a
                         staffe
                         .
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         And
                         commanded
                         them
                         ,
                         to
                         take
                         nothing
                         for
                         their
                         iournie
                         ,
                         saue
                         a
                         staffe
                         onely
                         ,
                         neither
                         scrip
                         ,
                         neither
                         bread
                         ,
                         nor
                         money
                         in
                         their
                         girdles
                         ,
                         but
                         that
                         they
                         should
                         bee
                         shod
                         with
                         sandales
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 Reconciliation
                 .
              
               
                 Distinguish
                 the
                 respects
                 .
                 Matthew
                 meaneth
                 such
                 a
                 staffe
                 ,
                 as
                 may
                 be
                 a
                 burthen
                 to
                 the
                 bearers
                 thereof
                 .
                 Marke
                 vnderstandeth
                 such
                 a
                 one
                 ,
                 as
                 may
                 sustaine
                 and
                 ease
                 those
                 that
                 trauell
                 ;
                 such
                 a
                 one
                 as
                 Iacob
                 vsed
                 ,
                 Genes
                 .
                 32.
                 10.
                 
                 Moreouer
                 ,
                 the
                 shooes
                 that
                 Matthew
                 mentioneth
                 are
                 new
                 ,
                 such
                 as
                 are
                 with
                 care
                 and
                 diligence
                 prepared
                 for
                 to
                 trauell
                 in
                 .
                 The
                 sandales
                 in
                 Marke
                 are
                 not
                 new
                 ,
                 but
                 such
                 as
                 are
                 daily
                 worne
                 on
                 the
                 feete
                 .
              
               
                 
                   From
                   this
                   fourth
                   Consectarie
                   many
                   Prouisoes
                   or
                   Cautions
                   arise
                   meete
                   to
                   be
                   obserued
                   in
                   the
                   reconciling
                   of
                   places
                   .
                
              
               
               
                 1
                 The
                 holy
                 Writers
                 speaking
                 of
                 things
                 and
                 persons
                 ,
                 that
                 are
                 past
                 ,
                 doe
                 anticipate
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 they
                 speak
                 of
                 thē
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 custome
                 of
                 that
                 place
                 and
                 time
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 they
                 wrote
                 .
                 Genes
                 .
                 12.
                 8.
                 
                 
                   Afterward
                   remouing
                   thence
                   vnto
                   a
                   mountaine
                   East-ward
                   from
                   Bethel
                   .
                
                 The
                 place
                 was
                 so
                 called
                 in
                 the
                 daies
                 of
                 Moses
                 :
                 but
                 in
                 Abrahams
                 time
                 it
                 was
                 not
                 called
                 Bethel
                 ,
                 but
                 Luz
                 .
                 Gen.
                 28.
                 19.
                 
                 Gen.
                 13.
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Abram
                   went
                   vp
                   out
                   of
                   Aegypt
                   —
                   towards
                   the
                   South
                
                 ;
                 not
                 in
                 respect
                 of
                 Aegypt
                 ,
                 but
                 of
                 that
                 place
                 wherein
                 Moses
                 was
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 Pet.
                 3.
                 19.
                 
                 
                   Christ
                   in
                   his
                   spirit
                   preached
                   to
                   them
                   that
                   are
                   in
                   prison
                   .
                
                 They
                 are
                 said
                 to
                 be
                 in
                 prison
                 in
                 regard
                 of
                 the
                 time
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 Peter
                 wrote
                 this
                 Epistle
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 of
                 that
                 wherein
                 Noah
                 liued
                 .
                 Psal.
                 105.
                 15.
                 
                 
                   Touch
                   not
                   mine
                   annointed
                   .
                   Abraham
                   ,
                   Isaak
                   ,
                
                 and
                 Iacob
                 are
                 said
                 to
                 be
                 annointed
                 in
                 respect
                 of
                 the
                 manner
                 and
                 fashion
                 of
                 the
                 time
                 wherein
                 Dauid
                 liued
                 .
                 For
                 they
                 had
                 no
                 externall
                 annointing
                 .
              
               
                 2
                 Allegories
                 are
                 to
                 be
                 expounded
                 according
                 to
                 the
                 scope
                 or
                 intent
                 of
                 the
                 place
                 .
                 So
                 Chrysostome
                 saith
                 vpon
                 the
                 8.
                 of
                 Matth.
                 
                   Parables
                   must
                   not
                   be
                   expounded
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   letter
                   ,
                   left
                   many
                   absurdities
                   
                   doe
                   follow
                   .
                   Aug.
                
                 vpon
                 the
                 8.
                 
                 Psalme
                 speaketh
                 on
                 this
                 sort
                 :
                 
                   In
                   euery
                   allegorie
                   this
                   rule
                   is
                   to
                   be
                   retained
                   ,
                   that
                   that
                   be
                   considered
                   according
                   to
                   the
                   purpose
                   of
                   the
                   present
                   place
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   there
                   spoken
                   of
                   vnder
                   a
                   similitude
                   .
                
              
               
                 3
                 Places
                 and
                 persons
                 in
                 the
                 Scriptures
                 haue
                 very
                 often
                 two
                 names
                 :
                 Gideon
                 was
                 called
                 Ierubbaal
                 ,
                 Iudg.
                 6.
                 32.
                 and
                 also
                 Ierubesheth
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 Sam.
                 11.
                 21.
                 
                 Abimelech
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Samuel
                 21.
                 3
                 ,
                 and
                 Abiathar
                 ,
                 Mark.
                 2.
                 26.
                 
                 Salomon
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Samuel
                 12.
                 24
                 ,
                 and
                 
                   Iedidiah
                   ,
                   25.
                   
                   Zimri
                
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Chron.
                 2.
                 6
                 ,
                 and
                 Zabdi
                 ,
                 Iosh.
                 7.
                 1.
                 
                 Hazariah
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 Chron.
                 22.
                 6
                 ,
                 and
                 Ahaziah
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Chr.
                 3.
                 11
                 ,
                 &
                 Iehoahaz
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 Chr.
                 21.
                 17.
                 
                 Iohanan
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Chr.
                 3.
                 15
                 ,
                 &
                 Iehoahaz
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 King.
                 23.
                 30
                 ,
                 and
                 also
                 Shallum
                 ,
                 Ierem.
                 22.
                 11.
                 
                 Iehoiachin
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 King.
                 24.
                 6
                 ,
                 and
                 Iachoniah
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Chro.
                 3.
                 16
                 ,
                 and
                 Coniah
                 ,
                 Ierem.
                 32.
                 24.
                 
                 Mephibosheth
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 Sam.
                 4
                 ,
                 and
                 Meribbaal
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Chro.
                 8.
                 34.
                 
                 Abinadab
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Chron.
                 10.
                 2
                 ,
                 and
                 Ishui
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Samuel
                 14.
                 49.
                 
                 Eliachim
                 and
                 Iachim
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 King.
                 23.
                 24.
                 
                 Ozias
                 &
                 Azarias
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 King.
                 15.
                 1.
                 2.
                 
                 Chr.
                 26.
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Hester
                   ,
                   Edissa
                
                 ,
                 Hest.
                 2.
                 7.
                 
                 
                   Simon
                   ,
                   Peter
                
                 ,
                 Iohn
                 1.
                 42.
                 and
                 Cephas
                 and
                 
                   Bariona
                   :
                   Ioses
                
                 and
                 Barnabas
                 ,
                 Act.
                 4.
                 36.
                 
                 Saul
                 and
                 Paul
                 ,
                 Act.
                 13.
                 6.
                 8.
                 
                 Matthew
                 and
                 
                   Leui.
                   Herusalem
                
                 is
                 called
                 Iebus
                 &
                 Salem
                 .
              
               
               
                 Moreouer
                 ,
                 the
                 name
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 indeede
                 one
                 ,
                 receiueth
                 many
                 times
                 changes
                 and
                 differences
                 .
                 As
                 Salmon
                 ,
                 Ruth
                 .
                 4.
                 21.
                 is
                 called
                 Salma
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 Chron.
                 2.
                 11.
                 
                 Abigal
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 Sam.
                 17.
                 25.
                 is
                 named
                 Abigail
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Chron.
                 2.
                 16.
                 
                 Tiglath-pilezer
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 King.
                 15.
                 19.
                 is
                 tearmed
                 Tilgath-pilneezer
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Chr.
                 5.
                 6.
                 
                 Aram
                 ,
                 Mat.
                 1.
                 3.
                 is
                 the
                 same
                 with
                 Ram
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Chr.
                 2.
                 9.
                 
              
               
                 Againe
                 ,
                 on
                 the
                 contrarie
                 ,
                 distinct
                 persons
                 ,
                 and
                 diuers
                 places
                 haue
                 one
                 name
                 :
                 Matth.
                 1.
                 11.
                 
                 
                   Iosiah
                   begat
                   Iecboniah
                   and
                   his
                   brethren
                   about
                   the
                   time
                   they
                   were
                   carried
                   axay
                   into
                   Babylon
                   .
                   12.
                   
                   And
                   after
                   they
                   were
                   carried
                   away
                   into
                   Babylon
                   Iechoniah
                   begat
                   Salathiel
                   .
                
                 Heere
                 now
                 ,
                 because
                 Iechoniah
                 doth
                 both
                 finish
                 the
                 *
                 second
                 tesseradecade
                 ,
                 and
                 begin
                 the
                 third
                 ,
                 one
                 of
                 them
                 wil
                 be
                 wanting
                 to
                 one
                 of
                 those
                 tesseradecads
                 ,
                 vnlesse
                 we
                 say
                 that
                 there
                 were
                 two
                 Iechoniases
                 both
                 father
                 and
                 sonne
                 .
                 Succoth
                 is
                 a
                 name
                 of
                 three
                 places
                 .
                 The
                 first
                 is
                 in
                 Aegypt
                 ,
                 Exo.
                 12.
                 37.
                 
                 The
                 second
                 in
                 the
                 tribe
                 of
                 Gad
                 ,
                 Iosh.
                 13.
                 27.
                 
                 The
                 third
                 in
                 the
                 tribe
                 of
                 Manasses
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 King.
                 7.
                 46.
                 
              
               
                 4
                 In
                 sacred
                 accounts
                 ,
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 the
                 wickednes
                 of
                 the
                 Prince
                 ,
                 either
                 his
                 name
                 or
                 the
                 number
                 of
                 yeeres
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 hee
                 
                 reigned
                 wickedly
                 ,
                 are
                 omitted
                 and
                 left
                 out
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 Sam.
                 13.
                 1.
                 
                 
                   Saul
                   reigned
                   two
                   yeeres
                   ouer
                   Israel
                
                 ;
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 lawfully
                 ,
                 or
                 as
                 Lyra
                 speaketh
                 ,
                 *
                 rightly
                 :
                 but
                 otherwaies
                 hee
                 reigned
                 longer
                 .
                 Matt.
                 1.
                 8.
                 
                 
                   Ioram
                   begat
                   Ozias
                
                 .
                 Here
                 three
                 are
                 left
                 out
                 for
                 their
                 wickednes
                 ,
                 to
                 wit
                 ,
                 
                   Ahaziah
                   ,
                   Ioas
                   ,
                   and
                   Amaziah
                   .
                
              
               
                 5
                 The
                 time
                 spoken
                 of
                 is
                 taken
                 either
                 *
                 compleatly
                 ,
                 or
                 vncompleatly
                 :
                 and
                 the
                 parts
                 thereof
                 are
                 vnderstood
                 either
                 inclusiuely
                 or
                 exclusiuely
                 ;
                 As
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Kings
                 15.
                 9.
                 
                 
                   And
                   in
                   the
                   twentith
                   yeere
                   of
                   Ieroboam
                   Asa
                   reigned
                   ouer
                   Iudah
                   .
                
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         King.
                         15.
                         25.
                         
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         King.
                         15.
                         28.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       Nadab
                       the
                       son
                       of
                       Ieroboam
                       [
                       began
                       to
                       reigne
                       ouer
                       Israel
                       the
                       second
                       yeere
                       ]
                       of
                       Asa
                       King
                       of
                       Iudah
                       :
                       and
                       reigned
                       ouer
                       Israel
                       [
                       two
                       yeere
                       .
                       ]
                    
                     
                       Euen
                       in
                       the
                       [
                       third
                       yeere
                       of
                       Asa
                       King
                       of
                       Iudah
                       ]
                       did
                       Baasha
                       slay
                       Nadab
                       ,
                       and
                       reigned
                       in
                       his
                       stead
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 Reconcilement
                 .
              
               
                 Nadab
                 ,
                 who
                 began
                 to
                 reigne
                 in
                 the
                 second
                 
                 yeere
                 of
                 Asa
                 ,
                 might
                 reigne
                 2.
                 yeres
                 ,
                 although
                 Baasha
                 succeed
                 him
                 in
                 the
                 third
                 yeere
                 of
                 Asa
                 ;
                 because
                 the
                 last
                 yeeres
                 of
                 
                 the
                 Kings
                 of
                 Israel
                 and
                 Iuda
                 are
                 not
                 fully
                 expired
                 ,
                 but
                 some
                 of
                 them
                 (
                 as
                 in
                 this
                 place
                 )
                 doe
                 scarsely
                 containe
                 moneths
                 in
                 them
                 :
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 yeeres
                 being
                 put
                 compleately
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         Mat.
                         17.
                         1.
                         
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         Luk.
                         9.
                         28.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       And
                       the
                       sixt
                       day
                       after
                       Iesus
                       tooke
                       Peter
                       ,
                       and
                       Iames
                       ,
                       and
                       Iohn
                       his
                       brother
                       ,
                       and
                       brought
                       them
                       vp
                       vnto
                       an
                       high
                       mountain
                       .
                    
                     
                       And
                       it
                       came
                       to
                       passe
                       about
                       an
                       eight
                       daies
                       after
                       ,
                       that
                       hauing
                       take
                       to
                       him
                       Peter
                       ,
                       and
                       Iames
                       ,
                       and
                       Iohn
                       ,
                       he
                       went
                       vp
                       into
                       a
                       mountaine
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 Reconcilement
                 .
              
               
                 Matthew
                 puts
                 exclusiuely
                 onely
                 the
                 daies
                 that
                 were
                 betweene
                 ,
                 which
                 were
                 altogether
                 accomplished
                 :
                 Luke
                 puts
                 in
                 the
                 reckoning
                 the
                 two
                 outtermost
                 daies
                 also
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 parts
                 of
                 time
                 are
                 put
                 sometimes
                 inclusiuely
                 ,
                 and
                 sometimes
                 exclusiuelie
                 .
                 1.
                 
                 That
                 the
                 number
                 may
                 be
                 more
                 perfect
                 .
                 
                 Augustine
                 saith
                 ,
                 quaest
                 .
                 47.
                 on
                 Exodus
                 .
                 
                   In
                   a
                   perfect
                   number
                   oftentimes
                   that
                   ,
                   which
                   is
                   either
                   wanting
                   or
                   abounding
                   ,
                   is
                   not
                   counted
                   .
                
                 Iudg.
                 11.
                 26.
                 
                 
                   Israel
                   dwelt
                   in
                   Heshbon
                   and
                   Aroer
                   and
                   their
                   townes
                   three
                   hundred
                   yeeres
                   .
                
                 These
                 yeeres
                 are
                 to
                 bee
                 reckned
                 from
                 the
                 departure
                 of
                 the
                 Israelites
                 out
                 of
                 Aegypt
                 ,
                 after
                 this
                 manner
                 .
                 The
                 time
                 of
                 their
                 abode
                 in
                 the
                 wildernes
                 was
                 40.
                 yeers
                 .
                 The
                 time
                 of
                 the
                 gouernment
                 of
                 Ioshua
                 was
                 17.
                 yeeres
                 :
                 of
                 Othoniel
                 ,
                 40.
                 yeeres
                 .
                 Iudg.
                 3.
                 11.
                 
                 Of
                 Ehud
                 and
                 Samgar
                 ,
                 80.
                 yeres
                 .
                 Iudg.
                 3.
                 30.
                 of
                 Barak
                 ,
                 40.
                 yeers
                 .
                 Iudg.
                 5.
                 51.
                 of
                 Gideon
                 ,
                 40.
                 yeers
                 .
                 Iudg.
                 8.
                 28.
                 of
                 Abimelech
                 ,
                 3.
                 yeers
                 .
                 Iud.
                 9.
                 22.
                 of
                 Tolah
                 ,
                 23.
                 yeers
                 ,
                 Iudg.
                 10.
                 2.
                 of
                 Iair
                 ,
                 22.
                 yeeres
                 .
                 Iudg.
                 10.
                 3.
                 
                 The
                 whole
                 in
                 all
                 is
                 ,
                 305.
                 yeeres
                 .
                 Here
                 therefore
                 the
                 fiue
                 odde
                 yeeres
                 are
                 not
                 named
                 ;
                 it
                 may
                 be
                 because
                 this
                 euen
                 number
                 of
                 three
                 hundred
                 is
                 fitter
                 both
                 for
                 the
                 computation
                 and
                 the
                 speech
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 For
                 breuitie
                 sake
                 :
                 Iudg.
                 20.
                 46.
                 
                 
                   There
                   were
                   slaine
                   of
                   the
                   Beniamites
                   twentie
                   fiue
                   thousand
                   .
                
                 Heere
                 an
                 hundred
                 are
                 not
                 counted
                 ,
                 as
                 appeareth
                 ,
                 verse
                 35.
                 
                 
                   The
                   Israelites
                   slew
                   that
                   day
                   of
                   the
                   tribe
                   of
                   Beniamin
                   fiue
                   and
                   twentie
                   thousand
                   and
                   a
                   hundred
                   men
                   .
                
              
               
               
                 5.
                 
                 The
                 King
                 being
                 hindred
                 either
                 with
                 forraine
                 warre
                 ,
                 or
                 with
                 old
                 age
                 ,
                 or
                 by
                 reason
                 of
                 some
                 disease
                 doth
                 whiles
                 he
                 yet
                 liueth
                 appoint
                 his
                 sonne
                 to
                 bee
                 King
                 in
                 his
                 stead
                 :
                 and
                 therefore
                 with
                 the
                 computations
                 of
                 the
                 yeeres
                 of
                 father
                 and
                 sonne
                 raigning
                 at
                 one
                 time
                 ,
                 the
                 yeeres
                 of
                 the
                 raigne
                 are
                 reckoned
                 sometimes
                 ioyntlie
                 ,
                 and
                 sometimes
                 apart
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         2.
                         
                         King.
                         1.
                         17.
                         
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         2.
                         
                         King.
                         3.
                         1.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         Ahaziah
                         died
                         ,
                         and
                         Iehoram
                         raigned
                         in
                         his
                         stead
                         [
                         in
                         the
                         second
                         yeere
                         of
                         Iehoram
                         the
                         son
                         of
                         Iehosaphat
                         ]
                         King
                         of
                         Iudah
                         .
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         Ichoram
                         the
                         sonne
                         of
                         Ahab
                         raigned
                         in
                         the
                         [
                         eighteenth
                         yeere
                         of
                         Iehosaphat
                         .
                         Chap.
                         8.
                         16.
                         
                         In
                         the
                         [
                         fift
                         yere
                         of
                         Ioram
                         the
                         sonne
                         of
                         Ahab
                         ]
                         Iehoram
                         the
                         sonne
                         of
                         Iehoshaphat
                         began
                         to
                         raigne
                         ,
                         and
                         raigned
                         eight
                         yeeres
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 Reconciliation
                 .
              
               
                 Iehoshaphat
                 determining
                 in
                 the
                 seuenteenth
                 yeere
                 of
                 his
                 reigne
                 to
                 helpe
                 King
                 Ahab
                 against
                 the
                 Syrians
                 appointeth
                 his
                 
                 sonne
                 Ioram
                 to
                 be
                 Vice-roy
                 .
                 In
                 the
                 eighteenth
                 yeere
                 of
                 his
                 owne
                 reigne
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 second
                 of
                 his
                 sonnes
                 ,
                 Ioram
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Ahab
                 reigned
                 .
                 Afterwards
                 in
                 the
                 fift
                 yeere
                 of
                 this
                 Ioram
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 
                   Ahab
                   ,
                   Iehosaphat
                
                 being
                 strucken
                 in
                 age
                 confirmeth
                 his
                 kingdome
                 to
                 his
                 sonne
                 Ioram
                 :
                 who
                 is
                 said
                 to
                 haue
                 reigned
                 eight
                 yeeres
                 ,
                 foure
                 whilst
                 his
                 father
                 was
                 aliue
                 ,
                 and
                 foure
                 alone
                 by
                 himselfe
                 after
                 the
                 death
                 of
                 his
                 father
                 .
              
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         2.
                         
                         King.
                         15.
                         30.
                         
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         2.
                         
                         King.
                         15.
                         33.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         And
                         Hoshea
                         the
                         son
                         of
                         Elah
                         wrought
                         treason
                         against
                         Pekah
                         the
                         sonne
                         of
                         Remaliah
                         ,
                         &
                         smote
                         him
                         ,
                         and
                         slew
                         him
                         ,
                         &
                         reigned
                         in
                         his
                         roome
                         [
                         in
                         the
                         twentith
                         yeere
                         of
                         Iotham
                         ]
                         the
                         sonne
                         of
                         Vzziah
                         .
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         Iotham
                         the
                         sonne
                         of
                         Vzziah
                         was
                         fiue
                         and
                         twentie
                         yeere
                         old
                         when
                         hee
                         began
                         to
                         reigne
                         [
                         and
                         hee
                         reigned
                         sixteene
                         yeeres
                         ]
                         in
                         Ierusalem
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 Reconciliation
                 .
              
               
                 He
                 reigned
                 sixteen
                 yeeres
                 alone
                 after
                 
                 his
                 fathers
                 death
                 :
                 he
                 reigned
                 also
                 twentie
                 with
                 his
                 father
                 :
                 for
                 he
                 gouerned
                 the
                 kingdome
                 for
                 his
                 father
                 who
                 was
                 diseased
                 with
                 the
                 leprosie
                 .
              
               
                 6.
                 
                 The
                 East-country
                 men
                 doe
                 diuerslie
                 distinguish
                 their
                 artificiall
                 day
                 ,
                 both
                 into
                 twelue
                 equall
                 houres
                 (
                 commonlie
                 called
                 planetarie
                 houres
                 )
                 and
                 into
                 quadrants
                 ,
                 hauing
                 their
                 name
                 of
                 the
                 houre
                 going
                 next
                 before
                 .
                 
                   Beroald
                   .
                   Chronol
                
                 .
              
               
                 
                   The
                   Easterne
                   mens
                   accounting
                
                 :
                 
                 .
              
               
                 
                   The
                   manner
                   of
                   our
                   counting
                
                 :
                 7.
                 8.
                 9.
                 10.
                 11.
                 12.
                 1.
                 2.
                 3.
                 4.
                 5.
                 6.
                 
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         Mark.
                         15.
                         25.
                         
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         Ioh.
                         19.
                         14.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         And
                         it
                         was
                         [
                         the
                         third
                         houre
                         ]
                         whē
                         they
                         crucified
                         him
                         .
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         And
                         it
                         was
                         the
                         preparatiō
                         of
                         the
                         Passeouer
                         ,
                         [
                         and
                         about
                         the
                         sixt
                         houre
                         ]
                         and
                         hee
                         said
                         vnto
                         the
                         Iewes
                         ,
                         Behold
                         your
                         King.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 The
                 Reconciliation
                 .
              
               
                 The
                 opposition
                 is
                 not
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 respect
                 :
                 therefore
                 distinguish
                 the
                 manners
                 of
                 accompting
                 the
                 houres
                 of
                 the
                 day
                 ,
                 and
                 then
                 it
                 will
                 appeare
                 that
                 Christ
                 might
                 bee
                 crucified
                 at
                 the
                 third
                 houre
                 and
                 about
                 the
                 fixt
                 .
              
               
                 7.
                 
                 The
                 lesser
                 number
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 counted
                 vnder
                 the
                 greater
                 and
                 the
                 more
                 compleat
                 .
                 Iudg.
                 3.
                 11.
                 
                 
                   The
                   land
                   had
                   rest
                   fortie
                   yeeres
                   when
                   Othoniel
                   died
                   .
                
                 Vnder
                 this
                 number
                 are
                 all
                 the
                 yeeres
                 comprehended
                 from
                 the
                 death
                 of
                 Ioshua
                 to
                 the
                 death
                 of
                 Othoniel
                 ,
                 as
                 also
                 the
                 eight
                 yeeres
                 of
                 seruitude
                 vnder
                 the
                 Syrians
                 .
                 Iudg.
                 3.
                 30.
                 
                 
                   The
                   land
                   had
                   rest
                   80.
                   yeers
                   .
                
                 Here
                 from
                 the
                 death
                 of
                 Othoniel
                 are
                 numbred
                 also
                 the
                 yeeres
                 of
                 Ehud
                 and
                 Samgar
                 .
                 For
                 Ehud
                 could
                 not
                 be
                 Iudge
                 80.
                 yeeres
                 :
                 for
                 when
                 these
                 yeeres
                 are
                 expired
                 the
                 whole
                 time
                 of
                 man
                 is
                 run
                 out
                 .
                 The
                 like
                 we
                 meete
                 with
                 ,
                 Iudg.
                 5.
                 31.
                 and
                 8.
                 28.
                 and
                 9.
                 22.
                 and.
                 10.
                 2.
                 3.
                 and
                 11.
                 26.
                 
                 Where
                 ,
                 in
                 the
                 three
                 hundred
                 yeeres
                 are
                 included
                 the
                 fortie
                 yeres
                 of
                 their
                 tarrying
                 in
                 the
                 desert
                 .
              
               
                 8.
                 
                 Filiation
                 or
                 Son-ship
                 is
                 either
                 naturall
                 
                 or
                 legall
                 .
                 Naturall
                 is
                 by
                 generation
                 :
                 legall
                 is
                 by
                 adoption
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 to
                 be
                 testified
                 by
                 education
                 and
                 bringing
                 vp
                 ,
                 and
                 by
                 succession
                 in
                 the
                 kingdome
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 *
                 Leuiration
                 by
                 the
                 law
                 of
                 redemption
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         2.
                         
                         Sam.
                         21.
                         8.
                         
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         1.
                         
                         Sam.
                         18.
                         19.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       And
                       the
                       King
                       took
                       the
                       fiue
                       sons
                       of
                       Michal
                       the
                       daughter
                       of
                       Saul
                       ,
                       whom
                       she
                       beare
                       to
                       Adriel
                       the
                       sonne
                       of
                       Barzilli
                       the
                       Mehalohite
                       .
                    
                     
                       When
                       Merab
                       Sauls
                       daughter
                       shuld
                       haue
                       been
                       giuen
                       to
                       Dauid
                       ,
                       she
                       was
                       giuen
                       vnto
                       Adriel
                       a
                       Mehalohite
                       to
                       wife
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
                 The
                 Reconciliation
                 .
              
               
                 They
                 are
                 the
                 naturall
                 sonnes
                 of
                 Merab
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 legall
                 sonnes
                 of
                 Michal
                 ;
                 and
                 therefore
                 
                   (
                   to
                   beare
                
                 )
                 doth
                 onely
                 signifie
                 to
                 bring
                 vp
                 ,
                 to
                 feede
                 and
                 to
                 nourish
                 .
                 For
                 thus
                 the
                 sonnes
                 of
                 Machir
                 ,
                 Gen.
                 50.
                 23.
                 are
                 said
                 to
                 be
                 
                   borne
                   (
                   nati
                   )
                   on
                   Iosephs
                   knees
                   ,
                
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 brought
                 vp
                 .
              
            
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       
                         Mat.
                         1.
                         12.
                         
                      
                    
                     
                       
                         Luk.
                         3.
                         27.
                         
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       Ieconias
                       begat
                       Salathiel
                       .
                    
                     
                       Salathiel
                       the
                       sonne
                       of
                       Neri
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
             
               
               
                 The
                 Reconciliation
                 .
              
               
                 Salathiel
                 was
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Neri
                 by
                 nature
                 :
                 and
                 the
                 sonne
                 of
                 Ieconias
                 legally
                 in
                 regard
                 of
                 succession
                 in
                 the
                 same
                 kingdome
                 .
                 After
                 this
                 manner
                 Zedekias
                 is
                 the
                 brother
                 of
                 Ieconias
                 or
                 Iehoiakin
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 Chron.
                 36.
                 10.
                 and
                 vncle
                 ,
                 2.
                 
                 King.
                 14.
                 17.
                 and
                 son
                 ,
                 1.
                 
                 Chro.
                 3.
                 16.
                 
                 His
                 brother
                 by
                 generation
                 ,
                 and
                 his
                 sonne
                 by
                 the
                 right
                 of
                 succession
                 .
                 On
                 this
                 maner
                 Matthew
                 and
                 Luke
                 are
                 reconciled
                 in
                 the
                 genealogie
                 of
                 Christ.
                 For
                 the
                 one
                 followes
                 the
                 naturall
                 order
                 ,
                 as
                 Luke
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 other
                 the
                 legall
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               Consect
               .
               5.
               
               When
               the
               naturall
               sense
               of
               the
               place
               (
               propounded
               )
               is
               giuen
               by
               the
               fore-said
               helpes
               ,
               a
               signification
               of
               a
               word
               signifying
               diuers
               things
               (
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               )
               shall
               bee
               giuen
               ,
               which
               is
               fitting
               to
               the
               place
               .
            
             
               Thus
               the
               significations
               of
               Uau
               the
               prefixe
               or
               copulatiue
               are
               (
               as
               Brunerus
               hath
               obserued
               in
               his
               Hebrew
               Grammer
               )
               distinguished
               according
               to
               the
               diuersitie
               of
               
               the
               places
               .
               It
               signifieth
               ,
               I.
               At
               ,
               Isa.
               9.
               10.
               
               
               Gen.
               42.
               10.
               
               II.
               Quoniam
               ,
               Isa.
               53.
               11.
               
               III.
               Quin
               ,
               Isa.
               9.
               11.
               
               Psalm
               .
               73.
               4.
               
               IIII.
               
                 id
                 est
              
               ,
               Isa.
               9.
               14.
               1.
               
               Sam.
               17.
               40.
               V.
               Idcirco
               ,
               Prou.
               1.
               18.
               
               VI.
               
                 Ita
                 vt
              
               ,
               Psal.
               18.
               39.
               
               Isa.
               24.
               20.
               
               VII
               .
               
                 Sic
                 etiam
              
               ,
               Isa.
               10.
               10.
               
               &
               51.
               11.
               
               VIII
               .
               
                 Et
                 tamen
              
               ,
               1.
               
               Chron.
               5.
               2.
               
               Nehe.
               9.
               19.
               
               IX
               .
               Atqui
               ,
               Psal.
               73.
               2.
               
               &
               19.
               6.
               X.
               
                 Posteà
                 tunc
              
               ,
               Isa.
               16.
               12.
               
               Gen.
               3.
               5.
               
               XI
               .
               Autem
               ,
               Isa.
               1.
               21.
               
               Nehe.
               2.
               9.
               
               XII
               .
               Etiam
               ,
               2.
               
               Reg.
               3.
               8.
               
               XIII
               .
               Num
               ,
               Isa.
               37.
               11.
               
               XIIII
               .
               
                 Sicut
                 ,
                 sicm
              
               Psal.
               125.
               2.
               
               Dan.
               7.
               2.
               
               XV.
               
                 Qui
                 ,
                 quae
                 ,
                 quod
              
               ,
               Isa.
               43.
               8.
               
               XVI
               .
               Quum
               ,
               Psal.
               50.
               17.
               
               XVII
               .
               Vt
               ,
               Isa.
               49.
               6.
               
               XVIII
               .
               Quamuis
               ,
               Iere.
               31.
               35.
               
               XIX
               .
               Inquam
               ,
               Isa.
               55.
               1.
               
               XX.
               Idque
               ,
               Psal.
               105.
               12.
               
               XXI
               .
               
                 Atque
                 ita
              
               ,
               Prou.
               3.
               4.
               
               XXII
               .
               
                 Et
                 vt
              
               Isa
               58.
               5.
               6.
               
               XXIII
               .
               
                 Quoniam
                 ,
                 ideo
              
               ,
               Psal.
               109
               17.
               
               XXIIII
               .
               Imò
               ,
               Psal.
               109.
               18.
               
               XXV
               .
               
                 Nec
                 non
              
               ,
               Psal.
               72.
               16.
               
               XXVI
               .
               Verùm
               ,
               Psal.
               73.
               23.
               
               XXVII
               .
               Etiamsi
               ,
               Iob.
               19.
               26.
               
               XXVIII
               .
               Aut
               ,
               Psal.
               139.
               7.
               
               XXIX
               .
               
                 Quòd
                 ,
                 idque
              
               ,
               Psa.
               139.
               14.
               
               XXX
               .
               
                 Et
                 verò
              
               ,
               Psal.
               139.
               17.
               
               XXXI
               .
               Tum
               ,
               Nehe.
               12.
               27.
               
               XXXII
               .
               Simulatque
               ,
               Iere
               ,
               50.
               43.
               
               XXXIII
               .
               
                 Si
                 sin
              
               ,
               2.
               
               Reg.
               5.
               17.
               
               XXXIIII
               .
               Nec
               ,
               Isa.
               41.
               8.
               
               XXXV
               .
               
                 Hoc
                 igitur
              
               ,
               Prou.
               17.
               33.
               
               XXXVI
               .
               
                 Vnà
                 cùm
              
               ,
               Prou.
               8.
               18.
               
               XXXVII
               .
               Quòd
               ,
               Gen.
               47.
               6.
               
            
             
             
               Thus
               it
               appeareth
               that
               
                 (
                 Berech
              
               )
               signifieth
               contrary
               things
               ,
               as
               
                 to
                 blesse
              
               &
               
                 to
                 curse
              
               .
               Iob.
               1.
               5.
               1.
               
               King.
               21.
               10.
               and
               11.
               2.
               9.
               
            
             
               To
               conclude
               ,
               hence
               it
               is
               euident
               that
               
                 (
                 Huchal
              
               )
               Gen.
               4.
               26.
               doth
               not
               signifie
               Prophaned
               ,
               but
               Begun
               .
               Reason
               .
               1.
               when
               Chalal
               signifieth
               to
               profane
               ,
               it
               ought
               to
               be
               ioyned
               with
               a
               nowne
               ,
               and
               to
               gouerne
               it
               ;
               but
               here
               it
               doth
               immediately
               follow
               Rara
               a
               verbe
               infinitiue
               .
               Reason
               .
               2.
               
               Amongst
               many
               causes
               of
               the
               
                 Deluge
                 Moses
              
               reckoneth
               not
               the
               prophanation
               of
               Gods
               worship
               ,
               which
               notwithstanding
               should
               haue
               been
               chiefly
               noted
               ,
               if
               so
               bee
               that
               it
               had
               raigned
               among
               the
               people
               of
               God.
               
            
          
           
             
               Consect
               .
               6.
               
               If
               a
               word
               giuen
               in
               the
               Bible
               ,
               whether
               it
               bee
               an
               Hebrew
               word
               or
               a
               Greeke
               ,
               if
               first
               it
               do
               agree
               with
               Grammaticall
               construction
               ,
               and
               with
               other
               approued
               copies
               :
               if
               also
               it
               doe
               agree
               in
               respect
               of
               the
               sense
               with
               the
               circumstances
               and
               drift
               of
               the
               place
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               analogie
               of
               faith
               ,
               it
               is
               proper
               and
               naturall
               .
            
             
               I
               lay
               downe
               this
               rule
               ,
               not
               because
               I
               
               thinke
               that
               the
               Hebrew
               and
               Greeke
               text
               is
               in
               all
               copies
               corrupted
               through
               the
               malice
               of
               the
               Iewes
               ,
               as
               Lindanus
               doth
               wickedly
               calumniate
               ,
               and
               after
               him
               all
               Papists
               :
               but
               that
               the
               diuers
               readings
               ,
               which
               in
               some
               places
               haue
               crept
               in
               ,
               either
               by
               reason
               of
               the
               vnskilfulnesse
               or
               negligence
               and
               ouersight
               of
               the
               Notaries
               ,
               might
               be
               skanned
               and
               determined
               .
               As
               ,
               Psal.
               22.
               16.
               
               In
               ordinary
               copies
               the
               words
               runne
               thus
               ;
               Caari
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               
                 As
                 a
                 Lion
                 my
                 hands
                 and
                 my
                 feete
                 .
              
               In
               other
               copies
               the
               reading
               is
               diuers
               ,
               after
               this
               manner
               :
               
                 Caaru
                 ,
                 They
                 haue
                 digged
                 (
                 or
                 pierced
                 )
                 my
                 hands
                 and
                 my
                 feete
                 .
              
               Now
               the
               rule
               propounded
               doth
               teach
               that
               this
               latter
               reading
               is
               to
               be
               followed
               .
               For
               it
               agreeth
               .
               1.
               with
               Grammaticall
               construction
               :
               2.
               with
               the
               circumstances
               of
               the
               Psalme
               :
               3.
               with
               some
               ancient
               copies
               :
               yea
               euen
               by
               the
               testimonie
               of
               the
               Iewes
               .
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             VI.
             
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               right
               Diuiding
               of
               the
               word
               .
            
          
           
             HItherto
             wee
             haue
             spoken
             of
             Interpreting
             the
             word
             .
             Wee
             are
             now
             come
             to
             speake
             of
             the
             *
             
               right
               cutting
            
             or
             the
             
               right
               diuiding
            
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             
               Right
               cutting
            
             of
             the
             word
             is
             that
             ,
             whereby
             the
             word
             is
             made
             fit
             to
             edifie
             the
             people
             of
             God.
             2.
             
             Tim.
             2.
             15.
             
             
               Study
               to
               shew
               thy selfe
               approued
               vnto
               God
               ,
               a
               workeman
               that
               neede
               not
               to
               be
               ashamed
               ,
               diuiding
               (
               or
            
             *
             
               cutting
               )
               the
               word
               of
               trueth
               aright
               .
            
             It
             is
             a
             Metaphor
             taken
             it
             may
             bee
             from
             the
             Leuites
             ,
             who
             might
             not
             cut
             the
             members
             of
             the
             sacrifices
             without
             due
             consideration
             .
             Isai.
             50.
             4.
             
             
               The
               Lord
               hath
               giuen
               me
               the
               tongue
               of
               the
               learned
               ,
               that
               I
               might
               know
               to
               minister
               a
               word
               in
               due
               season
               to
               him
               that
               is
               wearie
               .
            
             The
             partes
             thereof
             are
             two
             :
             Resolution
             or
             
             partition
             ,
             and
             Application
             .
          
           
             *
             Resolution
             is
             that
             ,
             whereby
             the
             place
             propounded
             is
             ,
             as
             a
             weauers
             web
             ,
             resolued
             (
             or
             vntwisted
             and
             vnloosed
             )
             into
             sundrie
             doctrines
             .
             Act.
             18.
             28.
             
             
               Mightilie
               he
               confuted
               the
               Iewes
               ,
               with
               great
               vehemencie
               publikely
               shewing
               by
               Scriptures
               that
               Iesus
               was
               that
               Christ.
               
            
          
           
             Resolution
             is
             either
             Notation
             ,
             or
             Collection
             .
          
           
             Notation
             is
             ,
             when
             as
             the
             doctrine
             is
             expressed
             in
             the
             place
             propounded
             .
             Rom.
             3.
             9.
             
             
               We
               haue
               alreadie
               proued
               that
               all
               both
               Iewes
               and
               Gentiles
               are
               vnder
               sinne
               .
               10.
               
               As
               it
               is
               written
               ;
               there
               is
               none
               righteous
               ,
               no
               not
               one
               .
               11.
               
               There
               is
               none
               that
               vnderstandeth
               ,
               none
               that
               seeketh
               God.
               12.
               
               All
               are
               gone
               out
               of
               the
               way
               :
               they
               haue
               been
               made
               altogether
               vnprofitable
               :
               there
               is
               none
               that
               doth
               good
               ,
               no
               not
               one
               .
            
             Act.
             2.
             24.
             
             
               Whom
               God
               hath
               raised
               vp
               ,
               and
               loosed
               the
               sorrowes
               of
               death
               ,
               because
               it
               was
               impossible
               that
               he
               shuld
               be
               held
               of
               it
               .
               25.
               
               For
               Dauid
               saith
               concerning
               him
               ,
               I
               beheld
               the
               Lord
               alwaies
               before
               me
               :
               for
               he
               is
               at
               my
               right
               hand
               ,
               that
               I
               should
               not
               bee
               shaken
               .
               26.
               
               Therefore
               did
               mine
               heart
               reioyee
               ,
               and
               my
               tongue
               was
               glad
               ,
               and
               moreouer
               also
               
               my
               flesh
               shall
               rest
               in
               hope
               .
               27.
               
               Because
               thou
               wilt
               not
               not
               leaue
               my
               soule
               with
               the
               dead
               ,
               neither
               wilt
               suffer
               thine
               holy
               one
               to
               see
               corruption
               .
            
          
           
             Collection
             is
             ,
             when
             the
             doctrine
             not
             expressed
             is
             soundly
             gathered
             out
             of
             y
             e
             text
             .
             This
             is
             done
             by
             the
             helpe
             of
             the
             nine
             arguments
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             of
             the
             causes
             ,
             effects
             ,
             subiects
             ,
             adiuncts
             ,
             dissentanies
             ,
             names
             ,
             distribution
             ,
             and
             definition
             .
             For
             example
             .
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       A
                       place
                    
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       collection
                    
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   Iohn
                   10.
                   34.
                   
                   Iesus
                   answered
                   them
                   ,
                   Is
                   it
                   not
                   written
                   in
                   your
                   law
                   ,
                   I
                   said
                   yee
                   are
                   Gods
                   ?
                
                 
                   
                     From
                     the
                     comparison
                     of
                     the
                     lesser
                     .
                  
                   35.
                   
                   If
                   hee
                   called
                   thē
                   Gods
                   ,
                   vnto
                   whom
                   the
                   word
                   of
                   God
                   was
                   giuen
                   ,
                   and
                   the
                   Scripture
                   cannot
                   bee
                   broken
                   :
                   36.
                   
                   Say
                   yee
                   of
                   me
                   ,
                   whom
                   the
                   Father
                   hath
                   sanctified
                   and
                   sent
                   into
                   the
                   world
                   ,
                   thou
                   blasphemest
                   ,
                   because
                   I
                   said
                   I
                   am
                   the
                   Sonne
                   of
                   God
                   ?
                
              
            
          
           
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     
                       A
                       place
                    
                     .
                  
                
                 
                   
                     
                       The
                       collection
                       from
                       the
                       lesser
                    
                     .
                  
                
              
               
                 
                   1.
                   
                   Cor.
                   9.
                   9.
                   
                   For
                   it
                   is
                   written
                   in
                   the
                   law
                   of
                   Moses
                   ,
                   thou
                   shalt
                   not
                   muzzle
                   the
                   mouth
                   of
                   the
                   oxe
                   ,
                   that
                   treadeth
                   out
                   the
                   corne
                   .
                   What
                   ,
                   hath
                   God
                   care
                   of
                   oxen
                   ?
                
                 
                   Vers.
                   4.
                   
                   Haue
                   we
                   not
                   power
                   to
                   eate
                   ,
                   and
                   to
                   drinke
                   ?
                
              
            
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     A
                     place
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     The
                     collection
                     from
                     the
                     contrarie
                  
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Gal.
                   3.
                   10.
                   
                   For
                   so
                   many
                   as
                   are
                   of
                   the
                   workes
                   of
                   the
                   law
                   are
                   vnder
                   a
                   curse
                   :
                   for
                   it
                   is
                   written
                   ,
                   Cursed
                   is
                   euery
                   one
                   ,
                   that
                   continueth
                   not
                   in
                   al
                   things
                   which
                   are
                   in
                   the
                   book
                   of
                   the
                   law
                   to
                   do
                   them
                   .
                
                 
                   Vers.
                   9.
                   
                   Therfore
                   those
                   which
                   are
                   of
                   faith
                   are
                   blessed
                   with
                   faithfull
                   Abraham
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Vers.
                   11.
                   
                   For
                   the
                   iust
                   shal
                   liue
                   by
                   faith
                   .
                
                 
                   Vers.
                   11.
                   
                   And
                   that
                   no
                   man
                   is
                   iustified
                   by
                   the
                   law
                   before
                   God
                   ,
                   it
                   is
                   euident
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     A
                     place
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     A
                     collection
                     from
                     the
                     Adiunct
                  
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Heb.
                   8.
                   
                   For
                   in
                   rebuking
                   them
                   he
                   saith
                   ,
                   Behold
                   ,
                   the
                   daies
                   will
                   come
                   ,
                   saith
                   the
                   Lord
                   ,
                   when
                   I
                   shall
                   make
                   with
                   the
                   house
                   of
                   Israel
                   &
                   with
                   the
                   house
                   of
                   Iudah
                   a
                   new
                   testament
                   .
                
                 
                   Heb.
                   8.
                   13.
                   
                   In
                   that
                   he
                   saith
                   a
                   new
                   testament
                   ,
                   hee
                   hath
                   disanulled
                   the
                   old
                   :
                   now
                   that
                   which
                   is
                   disanulled
                   and
                   waxed
                   old
                   is
                   readie
                   to
                   vanish
                   away
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
             In
             gathering
             of
             doctrines
             we
             must
             specially
             remember
             that
             an
             example
             in
             his
             owne
             kind
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             an
             Ethique
             ,
             Oeconomique
             ,
             Politique
             ,
             Ordinarie
             ,
             and
             Extraordinarie
             example
             hath
             the
             virtue
             of
             a
             general
             rule
             in
             Ethique
             ,
             Oeconomique
             ,
             Politique
             ,
             Ordinarie
             ,
             &
             Extraordinarie
             matters
             .
             The
             examples
             of
             the
             fathers
             are
             paterns
             for
             vs.
             1.
             
             Cor.
             10.
             11.
             
             *
             
               And
               whatsoeuer
               is
               written
               ,
               is
               written
               for
               our
               learning
               .
            
             And
             it
             is
             a
             Principle
             in
             Logique
             ,
             that
             the
             *
             Genus
             is
             actually
             in
             all
             the
             *
             species
             :
             and
             a
             rule
             in
             the
             Optiques
             ,
             that
             the
             generall
             species
             of
             things
             are
             perceiued
             before
             the
             particular
             .
          
           
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     A
                     place
                  
                   .
                
                 
                   
                     The
                     Collection
                     from
                     the
                     Species
                  
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Rom.
                   9.
                   7.
                   
                   Neither
                   are
                   they
                   all
                   children
                   ,
                   because
                   they
                   are
                   the
                   seede
                   of
                   Abraham
                   :
                   but
                   in
                   Isaac
                   shal
                   thy
                   seed
                   be
                   called
                   .
                   10.
                   
                   Neither
                   he
                   only
                   felt
                   this
                   ,
                   but
                   also
                   Rebecca
                   ,
                   when
                   shee
                   had
                   conceiued
                   by
                   one
                   ,
                   euen
                   by
                   our
                   father
                   Isaac
                   .
                
                 
                   Vers.
                   8.
                   
                   That
                   is
                   ,
                   they
                   which
                   are
                   the
                   children
                   of
                   the
                   flesh
                   ,
                   are
                   not
                   the
                   children
                   of
                   God
                   :
                   but
                   the
                   children
                   of
                   the
                   promise
                   are
                   counted
                   for
                   the
                   seede
                   .
                
              
               
                 
                   Rom.
                   4.
                   18.
                   
                   Which
                   Abraham
                   against
                   hope
                   ,
                   beleeued
                   vnder
                   hope
                   ,
                   &c.
                   21.
                   
                   Being
                   fully
                   assured
                   that
                   hee
                   which
                   had
                   promised
                   was
                   also
                   able
                   to
                   doe
                   it
                   .
                   22.
                   
                   And
                   therefore
                   it
                   was
                   imputed
                   to
                   him
                   for
                   righteousnesse
                   .
                
                 
                   Rom.
                   4.
                   23.
                   
                   Now
                   it
                   is
                   not
                   written
                   for
                   him
                   onely
                   ,
                   that
                   it
                   was
                   imputed
                   to
                   him
                   for
                   righteousnes
                   ,
                   24.
                   
                   But
                   for
                   vs
                   also
                   ,
                   to
                   whom
                   it
                   shal
                   be
                   imputed
                   for
                   righteousnesse
                   ,
                   which
                   beleeue
                   in
                   him
                   ,
                   that
                   raised
                   vp
                   Iesus
                   our
                   Lord
                   from
                   the
                   dead
                   .
                
              
            
          
           
           
             That
             also
             I
             adde
             ,
             that
             collections
             ought
             to
             be
             right
             and
             sound
             ,
             that
             is
             to
             say
             ,
             deriued
             from
             the
             genuine
             and
             proper
             meaning
             of
             the
             Scripture
             .
             If
             otherwise
             ,
             wee
             shall
             draw
             *
             any
             doctrine
             from
             any
             place
             .
             Prou.
             8.
             22.
             the
             Greeke
             translation
             of
             the
             Seuentie
             Interpreters
             is
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               The
               Lord
               hath
               created
               me
            
             ;
             it
             is
             the
             speech
             of
             Wisedome
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             of
             Christ
             speaking
             of
             himselfe
             .
             Whence
             the
             Arrians
             collect
             very
             wickedly
             ,
             that
             the
             Sonne
             was
             created
             .
             But
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             it
             is
             
               (
               Iehouah
               kanneni
               )
               The
               Lord
               hath
               possessed
               mee
               .
            
             Now
             the
             Father
             possesseth
             the
             Son
             ,
             because
             hee
             begat
             him
             from
             eternitie
             ,
             and
             because
             the
             Father
             is
             in
             the
             Sonne
             ,
             and
             the
             Sonne
             in
             the
             Father
             .
             And
             so
             ,
             Gen.
             4.
             1.
             
             When
             a
             Sonne
             was
             borne
             vnto
             Adam
             ,
             he
             saith
             ,
             
               I
               haue
               possessed
               a
               man
               from
               the
               Lord.
            
             The
             error
             perhaps
             came
             of
             this
             ,
             that
             *
             Ectise
             was
             either
             through
             ignorance
             or
             malice
             put
             for
             *
             
               Ectese
               .
               Augustine
            
             also
             vpon
             the
             tenth
             verse
             of
             the
             39.
             
             Psalme
             ,
             readeth
             on
             this
             wife
             :
             
               I
               held
               my
               peace
               because
               thou
               hast
               made
               me
               ,
               fecistime
               .
            
             From
             whence
             hee
             doth
             wittily
             gather
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             a
             marueile
             that
             he
             should
             holde
             his
             tongue
             ,
             that
             hath
             receiued
             a
             
             mouth
             to
             speake
             :
             whereas
             
               (
               me
            
             )
             is
             neither
             in
             the
             Hebrew
             nor
             in
             the
             Greeke
             .
             And
             vpon
             the
             72.
             
             Psalme
             and
             14.
             verse
             he
             disputeth
             much
             about
             vsuries
             ,
             and
             proueth
             that
             vsuries
             are
             sinnes
             :
             whereas
             there
             is
             no
             such
             matter
             in
             that
             text
             .
             For
             the
             words
             are
             ;
             
               He
               shall
               deliuer
               their
               soule
               from
               deceit
               and
               violence
               ,
               so
               precious
               is
               their
               blood
               in
               his
               eyes
               .
            
          
           
             It
             shall
             be
             lawfull
             also
             to
             gather
             Allegories
             :
             for
             they
             are
             arguments
             taken
             from
             things
             that
             are
             like
             ,
             and
             Paul
             in
             his
             teaching
             vseth
             them
             often
             .
             1.
             
             Cor.
             9.
             9.
             
             But
             they
             are
             to
             bee
             vsed
             with
             these
             cautions
             :
             1.
             
             Let
             them
             be
             vsed
             sparingly
             and
             soberly
             .
             2.
             
             Let
             them
             not
             be
             farre
             fetcht
             ,
             but
             fitting
             to
             the
             matter
             in
             hand
             .
             3.
             
             They
             must
             be
             quickly
             dispatcht
             .
             4.
             
             They
             are
             to
             bee
             vsed
             for
             instruction
             of
             the
             life
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             proue
             any
             point
             of
             faith
             .
          
           
             Any
             point
             of
             doctrine
             collected
             by
             iust
             consequence
             is
             *
             simply
             of
             it selfe
             to
             bee
             beleeued
             ,
             and
             doth
             *
             demonstrate
             .
             Act.
             18.
             24.
             
             
               And
               a
               certaine
               Iew
               ,
               named
               Apollos
               ,
               borne
               at
               Alexandria
               ,
               came
               to
               Ephesus
               ,
               an
               eloquent
               man
               and
               mightie
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               in
               the
               Scriptures
               .
               28.
               
               For
               mightily
               he
               confuted
               the
               
               Iewes
               publikely
               with
               great
               vehemencie
               ,
               demonstrating
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               by
               the
               Scriptures
               ,
               that
               Iesus
               was
               the
               Christ.
            
             From
             hence
             it
             followeth
             :
          
           
             First
             ,
             that
             humane
             testimonies
             whether
             of
             the
             Philosophers
             or
             of
             the
             Fathers
             are
             not
             to
             be
             alleaged
             .
             Augustine
             vpon
             the
             66.
             
             Psalme
             saith
             thus
             :
             
               If
               I
               speake
               ,
               let
               no
               man
               heare
               :
               if
               Christ
               speake
               ,
               woe
               bee
               to
               him
               that
               doth
               not
               heare
               .
            
             So
             againe
             he
             saith
             
               (
               De
               vnitat
               .
               Ecclesiae
               )
               Let
               vs
               not
               heare
               ,
               These
               things
               I
               say
               ,
               These
               things
               he
               saith
               :
               but
               let
               vs
               heare
               ,
               These
               things
               the
               Lord
               saith
               .
            
             Yet
             with
             this
             exception
             ,
             
               Vnlesse
               they
               conuince
               the
               conscience
               of
               the
               hearer
               .
            
             Thus
             Paul
             alleaged
             the
             testimonie
             of
             Aratus
             ;
             Act.
             17.
             28.
             
             
               For
               by
               him
               wee
               liue
               ,
               and
               moue
               ,
               and
               haue
               our
               being
               ,
               as
               one
               of
               your
               owne
               Poets
               hath
               said
               ;
               For
               wee
               are
               all
               his
               progenie
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             .
             29.
             
             
               Forasmuch
               then
               ,
               as
               we
               are
               the
               progenie
               of
               God
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             As
             also
             a
             saying
             of
             Menander
             ,
             1.
             
             Cor.
             15.
             33.
             
             
               Be
               not
               deceiued
               ,
               euill
            
             *
             
               conuersations
               corrupt
               good
               manners
            
             .
             And
             of
             Epimenides
             ,
             Tit.
             1.
             12.
             
             
               As
               one
               of
               their
               Prophets
               hath
               said
               ,
               the
               Cretians
               are
               alwaies
               liars
               ,
               euill
               beasts
               ,
               and
               slow
               bellies
               .
            
             And
             then
             also
             it
             must
             be
             done
             sparingly
             ,
             and
             with
             leauing
             
             out
             the
             name
             of
             the
             prophane
             writer
             .
          
           
             Secondly
             ,
             that
             a
             few
             testimonies
             of
             Scripture
             are
             to
             be
             vsed
             for
             the
             proofe
             of
             the
             doctrine
             :
             and
             that
             sometimes
             there
             is
             neede
             of
             none
             .
          
           
             Lastly
             ,
             hence
             it
             followes
             that
             the
             Prophets
             deliuering
             their
             doctrine
             thus
             ,
             are
             not
             to
             bee
             reprooued
             of
             other
             Prophets
             .
             1.
             
             Cor.
             14.
             32.
             
             
               And
               the
               spirits
               of
               the
               Prophets
               are
               subiect
               vnto
               the
               Prophets
               .
            
             Yet
             afterwards
             hee
             addeth
             ,
             vers
             .
             37.
             
             
               If
               any
               one
               seeme
               to
               be
               a
               Prophet
               or
               spirituall
               ,
               let
               him
               acknowledge
               that
               those
               things
               ,
               which
               I
               write
               vnto
               you
               ,
               are
               the
               commandements
               of
               God.
               
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VII
             .
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               waies
               how
               to
               vse
               and
               applie
               doctrines
               .
            
          
           
             APplication
             is
             that
             ,
             wherby
             the
             doctrine
             rightlie
             collected
             is
             diuerslly
             fitted
             according
             as
             place
             ,
             time
             ,
             and
             person
             doe
             require
             .
             Ezek.
             34.
             15.
             
             
               I
               will
               feede
               my
               sheepe
               ,
               and
               bring
               them
               to
               their
               rest
               ,
               saith
               the
               Lord.
               16.
               
               I
               will
               seeke
               that
               
               which
               is
               lost
               ,
               and
               bring
               againe
               that
               which
               was
               driuen
               away
               ,
               and
               will
               bind
               vp
               that
               which
               was
               broken
               ,
               and
               will
               strengthen
               the
               sicke
               .
            
             Iude
             22.
             
             
               And
               hauing
               compassion
               of
               some
               in
               putting
               difference
               .
               23.
               
               And
               saue
               other
               with
               terror
               ,
               pulling
               them
               out
               of
               the
               flame
               .
            
          
           
             The
             foundation
             of
             Application
             is
             to
             know
             whether
             the
             place
             propounded
             be
             a
             sentence
             of
             the
             Law
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Gospell
             .
             For
             when
             the
             word
             is
             preached
             there
             is
             one
             operation
             of
             the
             Law
             ,
             and
             another
             of
             the
             Gospell
             .
             For
             the
             Law
             is
             thus
             farre
             forth
             effectuall
             ,
             as
             to
             declare
             vnto
             vs
             the
             disease
             of
             sinne
             ,
             and
             by
             accident
             to
             exasperate
             and
             stirre
             it
             vp
             :
             but
             it
             affords
             no
             remedie
             .
             Now
             the
             Gospel
             ,
             as
             it
             teacheth
             what
             is
             to
             be
             done
             :
             so
             it
             hath
             also
             the
             efficacy
             of
             the
             holy
             Ghost
             adioyned
             with
             it
             ,
             by
             whom
             we
             being
             regenerated
             ,
             we
             haue
             strength
             both
             to
             beleeue
             the
             Gospell
             ,
             and
             to
             performe
             those
             things
             which
             it
             commaundeth
             .
             The
             Law
             therefore
             is
             the
             first
             in
             the
             order
             of
             teaching
             :
             and
             the
             Gospell
             second
             .
          
           
             It
             is
             a
             sentence
             of
             the
             Law
             ,
             which
             speaketh
             of
             perfect
             inherent
             righteousnes
             ,
             of
             eternall
             life
             giuen
             through
             the
             works
             of
             
             the
             Law
             ,
             of
             the
             contrarie
             sins
             ,
             and
             of
             the
             curse
             that
             is
             due
             vnto
             them
             .
             Gal.
             3.
             10.
             
             
               So
               many
               as
               are
               of
               the
               workes
               of
               Law
               ,
               are
               vnder
               the
               curse
               ;
               for
               it
               is
               written
               ,
               cursed
               is
               he
               whosoeuer
               abideth
               not
               in
               all
               things
               ,
               which
               are
               written
               in
               the
               booke
               of
               the
               Law
               to
               doe
               them
               .
            
             Matth.
             3.
             7.
             
             
               O
               generation
               of
               Vipers
               ,
               who
               hath
               fore-warned
               you
               to
               flee
               from
               the
               anger
               to
               come
               ?
               10.
               
               And
               now
               also
               is
               the
               axe
               put
               to
               the
               roote
               of
               the
               trees
               :
               therfore
               euery
               tree
               ,
               which
               bringeth
               not
               forth
               good
               fruit
               ,
               is
               cut
               vp
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               and
               cast
               into
               the
               fire
            
             .
          
           
             A
             sentence
             of
             the
             Gospell
             is
             that
             ,
             which
             speaketh
             of
             Christ
             and
             his
             benefits
             ,
             and
             of
             faith
             being
             fruitfull
             in
             good
             workes
             :
             as
             ,
             Iohn
             3.
             16.
             
             
               So
               God
               loued
               the
               world
               ,
               that
               hee
               gaue
               his
               onely
               begotten
               Sonne
               ,
               that
               whosoeuer
               beleeueth
               in
               him
               ,
               should
               not
               perish
               but
               haue
               euerlasting
               life
               .
            
          
           
             Hence
             it
             is
             that
             many
             sentences
             ,
             which
             seeme
             to
             belong
             to
             the
             Law
             ,
             are
             by
             reason
             of
             Christ
             to
             bee
             vnderstood
             not
             legally
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             but
             with
             the
             *
             qualification
             of
             the
             Gospell
             .
             Luk.
             11.
             28.
             
             
               Blessed
               are
               those
               which
               heare
               the
               word
               of
               God
               and
               keepe
               it
               .
            
             Deut.
             11.
             
             
               This
               commandement
               which
               I
               command
               thee
               this
               day
               ,
               is
               not
               hidden
               ,
               nor
               set
               
               a
               farre
               off
               ,
               but
               it
               is
               by
               thee
               in
               thy
               month
               and
               in
               thine
               heart
               .
            
             This
             sentence
             which
             is
             legall
             in
             Moses
             ,
             is
             euangelicalll
             in
             Paul
             :
             Rom.
             10.
             8.
             
             Psalm
             .
             119.
             1.
             
             
               Blessed
               are
               those
               that
               are
               perfect
               in
               the
               way
               ,
               who
               walke
               in
               the
               law
               of
               Iehouah
               .
               2.
               
               Blessed
               are
               they
               that
               keepe
               his
               testimonies
               and
               seeke
               him
               with
               their
               whole
               heart
               .
            
             Iohn
             14.
             21.
             
             
               Hee
               that
               hath
               my
               commandements
               ,
               and
               keepeth
               them
               ,
               is
               he
               that
               loueth
               me
               :
               he
               that
               loueth
               me
               shall
               be
               loued
               of
               my
               father
               .
               23.
               
               If
               any
               man
               doe
               loue
               me
               ,
               hee
               will
               keepe
               my
               word
               :
               and
               my
               father
               doth
               loue
               him
               ,
               and
               we
               will
               come
               vnto
               him
               ,
               and
               wee
               will
               dwell
               with
               him
               .
            
             Gen.
             6.
             9.
             
             
               Noah
               was
               a
               iust
               and
               vpright
               man
               in
               his
               time
               :
               Noah
               walked
               with
               God
            
             *
             continually
             .
             Gen.
             17.
             1.
             
             
               I
               am
               the
               strong
               God
               ,
               omnipotent
               ,
               walke
               alway
               before
               me
               and
               be
               vpright
               .
            
          
           
             The
             waies
             of
             Application
             are
             chieflie
             seuen
             ,
             according
             to
             the
             diuers
             condition
             of
             men
             and
             people
             ,
             which
             is
             seuenfold
             :
          
           
             
               I.
               Vnbeleeuers
               who
               are
               both
               ignorant
               and
               vnteachable
               .
            
             
               These
               men
               in
               the
               first
               place
               are
               to
               bee
               
               prepared
               to
               receiue
               the
               doctrine
               of
               the
               word
               .
               2.
               
               Chro.
               17.
               
               Iehosaphat
               sent
               Leuites
               throughout
               the
               cities
               of
               Iudah
               to
               teach
               the
               people
               and
               to
               bring
               them
               from
               Idols
               .
            
             
               This
               preparation
               is
               to
               be
               made
               partly
               by
               disputing
               or
               reasoning
               with
               them
               ,
               that
               thou
               maist
               throughly
               discerne
               their
               manners
               and
               disposition
               ,
               and
               partly
               by
               reprouing
               in
               them
               some
               notorious
               sinne
               ,
               that
               being
               pricked
               in
               heart
               and
               terrified
               ,
               they
               may
               become
               teachable
               .
               Act.
               17.
               17.
               
               
                 Hee
                 disputed
                 in
                 the
                 Synagogue
                 with
                 the
                 Iewes
                 ,
                 and
                 with
                 them
                 that
                 were
                 religious
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 market
                 place
                 with
                 whomsoeuer
                 he
                 met
                 .
              
               Act.
               9.
               3.
               
               
                 Now
                 as
                 hee
                 iournied
                 it
                 came
                 to
                 passe
                 ,
                 that
                 ,
                 as
                 hee
                 was
                 come
                 neere
                 to
                 Damascus
                 ,
                 suddenly
                 there
                 shined
                 round
                 about
                 him
                 a
                 light
                 from
                 heauen
                 .
                 4.
                 
                 And
                 hee
                 fell
                 to
                 the
                 earth
                 and
                 heard
                 a
                 voyce
                 saying
                 to
                 him
                 ,
                 Saul
                 ,
                 Saul
                 ,
                 why
                 persecutest
                 thou
                 me
                 ?
                 5.
                 
                 And
                 he
                 said
                 ,
                 Who
                 art
                 thou
                 Lord
                 ?
                 And
                 the
                 Lord
                 answered
                 ,
                 I
                 am
                 Iesus
                 of
                 Nazaret
                 ,
                 whom
                 thou
                 doest
                 persecute
                 :
                 it
                 is
                 hard
                 for
                 thee
                 to
                 kicke
                 against
                 the
                 pricks
                 .
              
               Act.
               16.
               27.
               
               
                 Then
                 the
                 keeper
                 of
                 the
                 prison
                 awoke
                 out
                 of
                 his
                 sleepe
                 :
                 and
                 when
                 he
                 saw
                 the
                 prison
                 doores
                 open
                 ,
                 he
                 drew
                 
                 out
                 his
                 sword
                 ,
                 and
                 would
                 haue
                 killed
                 himself
                 ,
                 supposing
                 the
                 prisoners
                 had
                 bin
                 fled
                 .
                 28.
                 
                 Then
                 Paul
                 cried
                 with
                 a
                 loud
                 voice
                 ,
                 saying
                 ,
                 Doe
                 thy selfe
                 no
                 harme
                 ,
                 for
                 we
                 are
                 all
                 here
                 .
                 29.
                 
                 Then
                 he
                 called
                 for
                 a
                 light
                 ,
                 and
                 leaped
                 in
                 ,
                 and
                 came
                 trembling
                 ,
                 and
                 fell
                 downe
                 before
                 Paul
                 and
                 Silas
                 .
                 30.
                 
                 And
                 brought
                 them
                 out
                 ,
                 and
                 said
                 ,
                 Sirs
                 ,
                 what
                 must
                 I
                 doe
                 to
                 be
                 saued
                 ?
                 31.
                 
                 And
                 they
                 said
                 ,
                 Beleeue
                 in
                 the
                 Lord
                 Iesus
                 and
                 thou
                 shalt
                 be
                 saued
                 ,
                 and
                 thine
                 household
                 .
              
               Act.
               17.
               22.
               
               
                 And
                 Paul
                 stood
                 in
                 the
                 midst
                 of
                 Marsstreete
                 ,
                 and
                 said
                 ,
                 Ye
                 men
                 of
                 Athens
                 ,
                 I
                 see
                 that
                 in
                 all
                 things
                 ye
                 are
              
               *
               
                 too
                 superstitious
                 .
                 23.
                 
                 For
                 as
                 I
                 passed
                 by
                 and
                 beheld
                 your
                 deuotions
                 ,
                 I
                 found
                 an
                 altar
                 ,
                 wherein
                 was
                 written
                 ,
                 Unto
                 the
                 vnknowne
                 God
                 ;
                 whom
                 ye
                 then
                 ignorantly
                 worship
                 ,
                 him
                 shew
                 I
                 vnto
                 you
                 .
                 24.
                 
                 God
                 ,
                 that
                 made
                 the
                 world
                 and
                 all
                 things
                 in
                 it
                 ,
                 seeing
                 that
                 he
                 is
                 Lord
                 of
                 heauen
                 and
                 earth
                 ,
                 dwelleth
                 not
                 in
                 temples
                 made
                 with
                 hands
                 .
              
            
             
               When
               now
               there
               is
               hope
               that
               they
               are
               become
               teachable
               and
               prepared
               ,
               the
               doctrine
               of
               Gods
               word
               is
               to
               be
               declared
               to
               them
               generally
               in
               some
               common
               termes
               or
               ordinarie
               points
               .
               Act.
               17.
               30.
               
               
                 And
                 the
                 time
                 of
                 this
                 ignorance
                 God
                 regarded
                 not
                 ,
                 but
                 now
                 he
                 commandeth
              
               (
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               )
               
                 all
                 men
                 euerie
                 
                 where
                 to
                 repent
                 .
                 31.
                 
                 Because
                 hee
                 hath
                 appointed
                 a
                 day
                 ,
                 in
                 which
                 hee
                 will
                 iudge
                 the
                 world
                 in
                 righteousnes
                 by
                 that
                 Man
                 whom
                 he
                 hath
                 appointed
                 ,
                 whereof
                 hee
                 hath
                 assured
                 all
                 men
                 ,
                 in
                 that
                 hee
                 hath
                 raised
                 him
                 from
                 the
                 dead
                 .
              
            
             
               If
               they
               shal
               approue
               this
               doctrine
               ,
               then
               it
               is
               to
               be
               opened
               to
               them
               distinctly
               &
               in
               euery
               particular
               ;
               but
               if
               they
               shall
               remaine
               vnteachable
               without
               hope
               of
               winning
               them
               ,
               they
               are
               to
               be
               left
               .
               Matth.
               7.
               6.
               
               
                 Giue
                 not
                 that
                 which
                 is
                 holy
                 vnto
                 dogges
                 :
                 neither
                 cast
                 your
                 pearles
                 before
                 swine
                 ,
                 lest
                 they
                 tread
                 them
                 vnder
                 their
                 feete
                 ,
                 and
                 turning
                 againe
                 all
                 to
                 rent
                 you
                 .
              
               Prou.
               9.
               8.
               
               
                 Reprooue
                 not
                 a
                 scorner
                 ,
                 lest
                 hee
                 hate
                 thee
                 .
              
               Act.
               19.
               9.
               
               
                 But
                 when
                 certaine
                 men
                 were
                 hardned
                 ,
                 and
                 would
                 not
                 obey
                 ,
                 speaking
                 euill
                 of
                 the
                 way
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 before
                 the
                 multitude
                 ,
                 he
                 departed
                 from
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 separated
                 the
                 Disciples
                 from
                 them
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               II.
               Some
               are
               teachable
               ,
               but
               yet
               ignorant
               .
            
             
               To
               these
               men
               the
               Catechisme
               must
               bee
               deliuered
               ,
               Act.
               18.
               25.
               
               
                 Apollos
                 was
                 catechized
              
               (
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               )
               
                 in
                 the
                 way
                 of
                 the
                 Lord.
                 And
                 
                 he
                 spake
                 feruentlie
                 in
                 the
                 spirit
                 ,
                 &
                 taught
                 diligently
                 the
                 things
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 ,
                 knowing
                 only
                 the
                 baptisme
                 of
              
               Iohn
               .
               26.
               
               
                 And
                 hee
                 began
                 to
                 speake
                 boldlie
                 in
                 the
                 Synagogue
                 .
                 Whom
                 when
                 Aquila
                 and.
                 Priscilla
                 had
                 heard
                 ,
                 they
                 tooke
                 him
                 vnto
                 them
                 ,
                 and
                 expounded
                 vnto
                 him
                 the
                 way
                 of
                 God
                 more
                 perfectly
                 .
              
               Luk.
               1.
               4.
               
               
                 That
                 thou
                 maist
                 know
                 the
                 trueth
                 of
                 those
                 things
                 ,
                 whereof
                 thou
                 hast
                 been
                 catechized
              
               (
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               )
               
                 or
                 instructed
              
               .
            
             
               The
               catechisme
               is
               the
               doctrine
               of
               the
               foundation
               of
               Christian
               religion
               ,
               brieflie
               propounded
               for
               the
               helpe
               of
               the
               vnderstanding
               and
               memorie
               in
               questions
               and
               answers
               made
               by
               the
               
                 liuely
                 voyce
              
               .
            
             
               The
               matter
               therfore
               of
               the
               Catechisme
               is
               the
               foundation
               of
               religion
               .
            
             
               The
               foundation
               is
               a
               certaine
               summe
               of
               the
               principles
               of
               Christianitie
               ,
               Heb.
               5.
               12.
               
               
                 For
                 when
                 as
                 concerning
                 the
                 time
                 ye
                 ought
                 to
                 be
                 teachers
                 ,
                 yet
                 haue
                 yee
                 neede
                 againe
                 that
                 we
                 teach
                 you
                 the
                 [
                 first
                 principles
                 of
                 the
                 word
                 ]
                 of
                 God.
                 
              
            
             
               A
               principle
               is
               that
               which
               doth
               directly
               and
               immediatly
               serue
               both
               for
               the
               saluation
               of
               men
               and
               for
               the
               glorie
               of
               God
               ,
               which
               being
               also
               denied
               and
               ouerturned
               
               no
               saluation
               can
               be
               hoped
               for
               .
            
             
               There
               are
               especiallie
               sixe
               principles
               :
               
                 Repentance
                 ,
                 Faith
                 ,
                 Baptismes
              
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               the
               Sacraments
               ,
               
                 Imposition
                 of
                 hands
              
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               the
               ministerie
               of
               the
               word
               by
               a
               Synecdoche
               ,
               
                 the
                 resurrection
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 last
                 iudgement
                 ,
              
               Heb.
               6.
               1.
               2.
               3.
               
            
             
               The
               forme
               of
               the
               Catechisme
               is
               to
               handle
               the
               elements
               or
               grounds
               plainelie
               by
               asking
               and
               answering
               ,
               1.
               
               Pet.
               3.
               21.
               
               
                 To
                 the
                 which
                 also
                 ,
                 the
                 figure
                 that
                 now
                 saueth
                 vs
                 ,
                 euen
                 baptisme
                 agreeth
                 (
                 not
                 the
                 putting
                 away
                 of
                 the
                 filthines
                 of
                 the
                 flesh
                 ,
                 but
                 the
                 stipulation
                 or
              
               *
               
                 interrogation
                 of
                 a
                 good
                 conscience
                 )
                 .
              
               Act.
               8.
               37.
               
               
                 What
                 doth
                 let
                 me
                 to
                 be
                 baptized
                 ?
                 And
                 Philip
                 said
                 vnto
                 him
                 ,
                 if
                 thou
                 beleeuest
                 with
                 all
                 thine
                 heart
                 ,
                 thou
                 maist
                 .
                 Then
                 hee
                 answered
                 saying
                 ,
                 I
                 beleeue
                 that
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 is
                 the
                 Sonne
                 of
                 God.
                 Tertullian
                 de
                 resurrect
                 ,
                 carnis
              
               saith
               :
               
                 The
                 soule
                 is
                 not
                 purged
                 with
                 washing
                 ,
                 but
                 with
                 answering
                 .
              
            
             
               And
               here
               wee
               must
               hold
               a
               difference
               betweene
               Milke
               and
               
                 strong
                 meate
              
               ,
               which
               are
               the
               same
               indeede
               ,
               but
               do
               differ
               in
               the
               manner
               and
               fashion
               of
               deliuering
               .
            
             
               Milke
               is
               a
               certaine
               briefe
               ,
               plaine
               and
               generall
               explication
               of
               the
               principles
               of
               
               the
               faith
               :
               as
               when
               a
               man
               doth
               teach
               y
               t
               we
               must
               beleeue
               one
               God
               and
               three
               persons
               ,
               Father
               ,
               Sonne
               &
               holy
               Ghost
               ;
               and
               that
               we
               must
               relie
               only
               vpon
               the
               grace
               of
               God
               in
               Christ
               ;
               and
               that
               wee
               ought
               to
               beleeue
               the
               remission
               of
               sinnes
               ;
               and
               when
               wee
               are
               taught
               that
               we
               ought
               to
               repent
               ,
               to
               obstaine
               from
               euill
               ,
               and
               to
               doe
               that
               which
               is
               good
               .
            
             
               
                 Strong
                 meate
              
               is
               a
               speciall
               ,
               copious
               ,
               luculent
               and
               cleere
               handling
               of
               the
               doctrine
               of
               faith
               :
               as
               when
               the
               condition
               of
               man
               before
               the
               fall
               ,
               his
               fall
               ,
               originall
               and
               actuall
               sinne
               ,
               mans
               guiltinesse
               ,
               free-will
               ,
               the
               mysteries
               of
               the
               Trinitie
               ,
               the
               two
               natures
               of
               Christ
               ,
               the
               personall
               vnion
               ,
               the
               office
               of
               Christ
               ,
               the
               imputation
               of
               righteousnes
               ,
               faith
               ,
               grace
               ,
               and
               the
               vse
               of
               the
               law
               ,
               are
               deliuered
               out
               of
               the
               word
               of
               God
               distinctly
               and
               exactly
               .
            
             
               Moreouer
               ,
               milke
               must
               bee
               set
               before
               babes
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               those
               that
               are
               rude
               or
               weak
               in
               knowledge
               :
               
                 strong
                 meat
              
               must
               be
               giuen
               to
               such
               as
               are
               of
               ripe
               yeres
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               to
               them
               that
               are
               better
               instructed
               .
               1.
               
               Cor.
               3.
               1.
               
               
                 Moreouer
                 ,
                 brethren
                 ,
                 I
                 could
                 not
                 speake
                 vnto
                 you
                 as
                 to
                 spirituall
                 :
                 but
                 I
                 haue
                 spoken
                 vnto
                 
                 you
                 as
                 to
                 carnall
                 ,
                 that
                 is
                 ,
                 to
                 infants
                 in
                 Christ.
                 2.
                 
                 I
                 haue
                 fed
                 you
                 with
                 milke
                 ,
                 and
                 not
                 with
                 meate
                 .
              
               Heb.
               5.
               13.
               
            
          
           
             
               III.
               Some
               haue
               knowledge
               ,
               but
               are
               not
               as
               yet
               humbled
               .
            
             
               In
               such
               the
               foundation
               of
               repentance
               ought
               to
               bee
               stirred
               vp
               ,
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               a
               certaine
               sorrow
               which
               is
               according
               to
               God.
               2.
               
               Cor.
               7.
               8.
               
               
                 For
                 though
                 I
                 made
                 you
                 sorrie
                 with
                 a
                 letter
                 ,
                 I
                 repent
                 not
                 ,
                 though
                 I
                 did
                 repent
                 :
                 for
                 I
                 perceiue
                 that
                 the
                 same
                 Epistle
                 made
                 you
                 sorie
                 ,
                 though
                 it
                 were
                 but
                 for
                 a
                 season
                 .
                 9.
                 
                 I
                 now
                 reioyce
                 ,
                 not
                 that
                 yee
                 were
                 sory
                 ,
                 but
                 that
                 ye
                 sorrowed
                 to
                 repentance
                 :
                 for
                 yee
                 sorrowed
                 according
                 to
                 God
                 (
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 )
                 so
                 that
                 in
                 nothing
                 ye
                 were
                 hurt
                 by
                 vs.
                 10.
                 
                 For
                 sorrow
                 ,
                 which
                 is
                 according
                 to
                 God
                 (
                 or
                 godly
                 )
                 causeth
                 repentance
                 vnto
                 saluation
                 not
                 to
                 bee
                 repented
                 of
                 :
                 but
                 worldly
                 sorrow
                 causeth
                 death
                 .
              
            
             
               Sorrow
               according
               to
               God
               ,
               is
               a
               griefe
               for
               sinne
               ,
               euen
               because
               it
               is
               sinne
               .
            
             
               To
               the
               stirring
               vp
               of
               this
               affection
               ,
               in
               the
               first
               place
               a
               man
               must
               vse
               the
               ministerie
               of
               the
               Law
               ,
               which
               may
               beget
               contrition
               
               of
               heart
               ,
               or
               the
               horrors
               of
               conscience
               ,
               which
               though
               it
               bee
               not
               a
               thing
               wholesome
               and
               profitable
               of
               it
               owne
               nature
               ,
               yet
               is
               it
               a
               remedie
               necessarie
               for
               the
               subduing
               of
               a
               sinners
               stubbernnesse
               ,
               and
               for
               the
               preparing
               of
               his
               minde
               to
               become
               teachable
               .
            
             
               Now
               ,
               that
               this
               legall
               sorrow
               may
               be
               wrought
               ,
               it
               is
               fit
               to
               vse
               some
               choyce
               parcell
               of
               the
               law
               ,
               which
               may
               reprooue
               some
               one
               notable
               sinne
               in
               men
               that
               are
               not
               as
               yet
               humbled
               .
               For
               sorrow
               for
               ,
               and
               repentance
               *
               euen
               of
               one
               sinne
               is
               for
               substance
               (
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               )
               sorrow
               for
               and
               repentance
               of
               all
               .
               Act.
               8.
               22.
               
               
                 Repent
                 therefore
                 of
                 this
                 thy
                 wickednes
                 ,
                 and
                 pray
                 God
                 ,
                 that
                 if
                 it
                 be
                 possible
                 ,
                 the
                 thought
                 of
                 thine
                 heart
                 may
                 be
                 forgiuen
                 thee
                 .
              
               Act.
               2.
               23.
               
               
                 Him
                 haue
                 yee
                 taken
                 by
                 the
                 hands
                 of
                 the
                 wicked
                 ,
                 being
                 deliuered
                 by
                 the
                 determinate
                 counsell
                 ,
                 and
                 foreknowledge
                 of
                 God
                 ,
                 and
                 haue
                 crucified
                 and
                 slaine
                 .
              
               Psalm
               .
               32.
               5.
               
            
             
               Yea
               further
               ,
               if
               any
               man
               being
               afflicted
               with
               the
               crosse
               ,
               and
               with
               outward
               calamities
               haue
               only
               a
               worldly
               sorrow
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               if
               he
               mourne
               not
               for
               sinne
               as
               it
               is
               sinne
               ,
               but
               for
               the
               punishment
               of
               sinne
               ,
               hee
               is
               not
               by
               and
               by
               to
               be
               comforted
               ,
               but
               first
               this
               sorrow
               
               is
               to
               be
               turned
               into
               that
               other
               sorrow
               which
               is
               *
               according
               to
               God
               :
               as
               is
               the
               counsell
               of
               Physitians
               in
               the
               like
               case
               .
               For
               if
               a
               mans
               life
               be
               in
               danger
               by
               reason
               of
               bloud
               gushing
               out
               at
               his
               nose
               :
               they
               commaund
               also
               that
               bloud
               bee
               let
               out
               in
               his
               arme
               or
               in
               some
               other
               place
               as
               the
               case
               requireth
               ,
               that
               they
               might
               stay
               the
               course
               of
               the
               bloud
               which
               rusheth
               out
               at
               the
               nostrils
               ,
               that
               so
               they
               might
               saue
               his
               life
               ,
               who
               was
               readie
               to
               yeeld
               vp
               the
               ghost
               .
            
             
               Then
               let
               the
               Gospell
               be
               preached
               ,
               in
               the
               preaching
               wherof
               the
               holy
               Spirit
               worketh
               effectually
               vnto
               saluation
               .
               For
               whilst
               he
               reneweth
               men
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               begin
               to
               will
               and
               to
               worke
               those
               things
               that
               are
               pleasing
               to
               God
               ,
               he
               doth
               truely
               and
               properly
               bring
               forth
               in
               them
               that
               sorrow
               which
               is
               according
               to
               God
               and
               repentance
               vnto
               saluation
               .
            
             
               To
               the
               hard-harted
               the
               Law
               must
               bee
               vrged
               ,
               and
               the
               curse
               of
               the
               Law
               must
               bee
               denounced
               with
               threatning
               ,
               together
               with
               the
               difficultie
               of
               obtaining
               deliuerance
               vntill
               they
               bee
               purified
               in
               the
               heart
               .
               Matth.
               3.
               7.
               
               
                 And
                 when
                 hee
                 saw
                 many
                 of
                 the
                 
                 Pharises
                 and
                 of
                 the
                 Sadduces
                 come
                 to
                 his
                 baptisme
                 ,
                 he
                 said
                 vnto
                 them
                 ,
                 O
              
               *
               
                 progeny
                 of
                 Vipers
                 ,
                 who
                 hath
                 forewarned
                 you
                 to
                 flie
                 from
                 the
                 wrath
                 to
                 come
                 ?
              
               Matth.
               19.
               16.
               
               
                 Good
                 Master
                 ,
                 what
                 shall
                 I
                 doe
                 that
                 I
                 may
                 haue
                 eternall
                 life
                 ?
                 17.
                 
                 And
                 he
                 said
                 vnto
                 him
                 —
                 if
                 thou
                 wilt
                 enter
                 into
                 life
                 ,
                 keepe
                 the
                 commaundements
                 .
              
               Mat.
               23.
               13.
               
               
                 Woe
                 vnto
                 you
                 Scribes
                 and
                 Pharisies
                 ,
                 hypocrites
                 ,
                 because
                 ye
                 shut
                 vp
                 the
                 kingdome
                 of
                 heauen
                 before
                 men
                 :
                 for
                 yee
                 your selues
                 goe
                 not
                 in
                 ,
                 neither
                 suffer
                 ye
                 those
                 that
                 are
                 entring
                 in
                 (
                 
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                   〈◊〉
                
                 )
                 to
                 go
                 in
                 ,
                 &c.
                 
              
               Vers.
               33.
               
               
                 O
                 Serpents
                 ,
                 and
                 progeny
                 of
                 Vipers
                 ,
                 how
                 shall
                 ye
                 escape
                 the
                 damnation
                 of
                 hell
                 ?
              
            
             
               But
               when
               the
               beginning
               of
               compunction
               doth
               appeare
               ,
               they
               are
               presently
               to
               be
               comforted
               with
               the
               Gospell
               .
            
          
           
             
               IIII.
               Some
               are
               humbled
               .
            
             
               Here
               we
               must
               very
               diligently
               consider
               whether
               their
               humiliation
               bee
               compleat
               and
               sound
               ,
               or
               but
               begun
               and
               but
               light
               or
               slight
               :
               lest
               that
               hee
               or
               they
               ,
               receiuing
               comfort
               sooner
               than
               is
               meete
               ,
               should
               afterwards
               wax
               more
               hard
               ;
               like
               iron
               ,
               which
               being
               cast
               into
               the
               fornace
               becomes
               exceeding
               
               hard
               ,
               after
               that
               it
               is
               once
               cold
               .
            
             
               Let
               thy
               proceeding
               bee
               after
               this
               manner
               with
               those
               ,
               that
               are
               humbled
               in
               part
               .
               Let
               the
               Law
               bee
               propounded
               ,
               yet
               so
               discreetly
               tempered
               with
               the
               Gospell
               ,
               that
               being
               terrified
               with
               their
               sinnes
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               meditation
               of
               Gods
               iudgement
               ,
               they
               may
               together
               also
               at
               the
               same
               instant
               receiue
               solace
               by
               the
               Gospell
               .
               Act.
               8.
               20.
               
               
                 Then
                 Peter
                 said
                 vnto
                 him
                 ,
                 thy
                 monie
                 perish
                 with
                 thee
                 ,
                 because
                 thou
                 thinkest
                 that
                 the
                 gift
                 of
                 God
                 may
                 be
                 obtained
                 by
                 monie
                 .
                 21.
                 
                 Thou
                 hast
                 neither
                 part
                 ,
                 nor
                 fellowship
                 in
                 this
                 busines
                 ,
                 for
                 thine
                 hart
                 is
                 not
                 right
                 in
                 the
                 sight
                 of
                 God.
                 22.
                 
                 Repent
                 therefore
                 of
                 this
                 thy
                 wickednes
                 ,
                 and
                 pray
                 God
                 ,
                 that
                 if
                 it
                 be
                 possible
                 the
                 cogitation
                 of
                 thine
                 heart
                 may
                 bee
                 remitted
                 .
                 23.
                 
                 For
                 I
                 see
                 that
                 thou
                 art
                 in
                 the
                 gall
                 of
                 bitternes
                 ,
                 and
                 in
                 the
                 bond
                 of
                 iniquity
                 .
              
               Gen.
               3.
               9.
               
               
                 And
                 the
                 Lord
                 God
                 cried
                 vnto
                 Adam
                 ,
                 and
                 said
                 vnto
                 him
                 ,
                 where
                 art
                 thou
                 ?
                 And
                 God
                 said
                 ,
                 who
                 hath
                 shewed
                 thee
                 that
                 thou
                 art
                 naked
                 ?
                 What
                 ,
                 hast
                 thou
                 eaten
                 of
                 the
                 fruit
                 of
                 that
                 tree
                 ,
                 of
                 which
                 I
                 forbad
                 thee
                 to
                 eat
                 ?
                 13.
                 
                 And
                 the
                 Lord
                 God
                 said
                 to
                 the
                 woman
                 ,
                 what
                 is
                 this
                 which
                 thou
                 hast
                 done
                 ?
                 And
                 the
                 woman
                 said
                 ,
                 this
                 Serpent
                 hath
                 seduced
                 me
                 ,
                 
                 and
                 I
                 haue
                 eaten
                 .
                 15.
                 
                 Moreouer
                 ,
                 I
                 will
                 put
                 enmitie
                 betwixt
                 thee
                 and
                 this
                 woman
                 ,
                 and
                 likewise
                 betweene
                 thy
                 seede
                 and
                 her
                 seede
                 :
                 this
                 shall
                 breake
                 thine
                 head
                 ,
                 and
                 thou
                 shalt
                 bruise
                 his
                 heele
                 .
              
               2.
               
               Sam.
               12.
               
               Nathan
               being
               sent
               from
               God
               ,
               by
               a
               parable
               which
               hee
               doth
               propound
               ,
               he
               recalleth
               Dauid
               to
               the
               conscience
               of
               his
               fact
               ,
               and
               pronounceth
               pardon
               to
               him
               being
               penitent
               .
            
             
               The
               doctrine
               of
               faith
               and
               repentance
               and
               the
               comforts
               of
               the
               Gospell
               ought
               to
               be
               promulged
               and
               tendred
               to
               those
               that
               are
               fully
               humbled
               .
               Luk.
               4.
               18.
               
               
                 The
                 Spirit
                 of
                 the
                 Lord
                 is
                 vpon
                 me
                 ,
                 therefore
                 he
                 hath
                 annointed
                 mee
                 to
                 preach
                 glad
                 tidings
                 to
                 the
                 poore
                 :
                 he
                 hath
                 sent
                 me
                 to
                 heale
                 the
                 contrite
                 in
                 heart
                 ,
                 to
                 preach
                 deliuerance
                 to
                 the
                 Captiues
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 the
                 blind
                 the
                 recouerie
                 of
                 their
                 sight
                 ,
                 and
                 to
                 set
                 at
                 libertie
                 those
                 that
                 were
                 broken
                 .
              
               Act.
               2.
               37.
               
               
                 When
                 they
                 heard
                 these
                 things
                 ,
                 they
                 were
                 pricked
                 in
                 heart
                 ,
                 and
                 said
                 vnto
                 Peter
                 ,
                 and
                 the
                 rest
                 of
                 the
                 Apostles
                 ,
                 Men
                 and
                 Brethren
                 ,
                 what
                 shall
                 wee
                 doe
                 ?
                 38.
                 
                 And
                 Peter
                 said
                 vnto
                 them
                 :
                 Repent
                 and
                 bee
                 baptised
                 euerie
                 one
                 of
                 you
                 in
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 Iesus
                 Christ
                 for
                 the
                 remission
                 of
                 sinnes
                 .
              
               Matth.
               9.
               13.
               
               
                 I
                 came
                 not
                 to
                 call
                 the
                 iust
                 ,
                 
                 but
                 sinners
                 vnto
                 repantance
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               V.
               Some
               doe
               beleeue
               .
            
             
               To
               these
               must
               be
               propounded
               .
               1.
               
               The
               Gospell
               of
               iustification
               ,
               sanctification
               ,
               and
               perseuerance
               .
               2.
               
               The
               law
               without
               the
               curse
               ,
               whereby
               they
               may
               be
               taught
               to
               bring
               forth
               fruites
               of
               new
               obedience
               beseeming
               repentance
               .
               Rom.
               8.
               1.
               
               
                 There
                 is
                 no
                 condemnation
                 to
                 those
                 that
                 are
                 in
                 Christ
                 Iesus
                 .
              
               1.
               
               Tim.
               1.
               9.
               
               
                 The
                 law
                 is
                 not
                 appointed
                 for
                 the
                 righteous
                 .
              
               Let
               the
               Epistle
               of
               Paul
               to
               the
               Romans
               be
               the
               example
               .
               3.
               
               Howsoeuer
               the
               curse
               of
               the
               law
               is
               not
               to
               be
               vrged
               against
               the
               person
               that
               is
               righteous
               and
               holy
               in
               the
               sight
               of
               God
               ,
               yet
               it
               is
               to
               be
               vrged
               against
               the
               sinnes
               of
               the
               person
               ,
               which
               are
               remaining
               .
               And
               as
               a
               father
               doth
               oftentimes
               set
               his
               yron
               rods
               that
               are
               appointed
               for
               the
               seruants
               before
               the
               eyes
               of
               his
               sonnes
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               be
               frayed
               :
               so
               the
               meditation
               of
               the
               curse
               is
               to
               be
               stirred
               vp
               very
               often
               in
               the
               faithfull
               themselues
               ,
               left
               they
               should
               abuse
               the
               mercie
               of
               God
               to
               licencious
               liuing
               ,
               and
               that
               they
               may
               be
               more
               fully
               humbled
               .
               For
               sanctification
               is
               
               but
               in
               part
               :
               therefore
               that
               the
               remainders
               of
               sinne
               may
               bee
               abolished
               ,
               wee
               must
               alwaies
               begin
               with
               the
               meditation
               of
               the
               law
               ,
               and
               with
               the
               feeling
               of
               sinne
               ,
               and
               make
               an
               end
               in
               the
               Gospell
               .
            
          
           
             
               VI.
               Some
               are
               fallen
               .
            
             
               Those
               that
               are
               fallen
               are
               they
               ,
               which
               doe
               in
               part
               fall
               from
               the
               state
               of
               grace
               .
            
             
               Falling
               is
               either
               in
               faith
               or
               in
               manners
               .
            
             
               Falling
               in
               faith
               is
               either
               in
               the
               knowledge
               of
               the
               doctrine
               of
               the
               Gospell
               ,
               or
               in
               the
               apprehending
               of
               Christ.
               
            
             
               Falling
               in
               knowledge
               is
               a
               declining
               into
               error
               ,
               whether
               lighter
               or
               fundamentall
               .
            
             
               Now
               vnto
               those
               that
               fall
               thus
               ,
               that
               doctrine
               which
               doth
               crosse
               their
               error
               ,
               is
               to
               be
               demonstrated
               and
               inculcated
               (
               or
               beaten
               vpon
               them
               )
               together
               with
               the
               doctrine
               of
               repentance
               ,
               and
               that
               with
               a
               brotherly
               affection
               .
               Take
               for
               an
               example
               the
               Epistle
               of
               Paul
               to
               the
               Galatians
               .
               2.
               
               Tim.
               2.
               25.
               
               
                 Instructing
                 them
                 with
                 meekenes
                 that
                 are
              
               (
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               )
               
                 contrarilie
                 affected
                 :
                 if
                 God
                 at
                 any
                 time
                 will
                 giue
                 them
                 repentance
                 that
                 they
                 may
                 know
                 the
                 trueth
                 .
              
            
             
             
               The
               fall
               which
               is
               in
               apprehending
               Christ
               ,
               is
               desperation
               .
            
             
               For
               the
               restoring
               of
               those
               that
               doe
               despaire
               ,
               there
               are
               to
               be
               vsed
               a
               Triall
               ,
               and
               the
               Remedie
               .
            
             
               The
               Triall
               or
               Search
               is
               either
               of
               the
               cause
               of
               the
               temptation
               ,
               or
               of
               their
               estate
               .
            
             
               The
               triall
               of
               the
               Cause
               is
               made
               fitly
               by
               priuate
               confession
               .
               Iam.
               5.
               17.
               
               
                 Confesse
                 your
                 sinnes
                 one
                 to
                 another
                 ,
                 and
                 pray
                 for
                 one
                 another
                 that
                 ye
                 may
                 be
                 healed
                 .
              
               But
               lest
               that
               confession
               should
               bee
               made
               a
               kinde
               of
               racke
               or
               torture
               ,
               it
               must
               be
               limited
               with
               these
               prouisoes
               .
               1.
               
               It
               ought
               to
               be
               free
               ,
               and
               not
               compelled
               :
               because
               saluation
               depends
               not
               vpon
               it
               .
               2.
               
               It
               must
               not
               be
               of
               all
               sinnes
               ,
               but
               of
               those
               onely
               which
               wring
               the
               conscience
               ,
               which
               vnlesse
               they
               doe
               reueale
               ,
               greater
               danger
               may
               hang
               ouer
               their
               heads
               .
               3.
               
               Let
               it
               chiefely
               be
               made
               to
               Pastours
               ;
               yet
               so
               as
               that
               we
               must
               know
               that
               it
               may
               be
               safely
               made
               to
               other
               faithfull
               men
               in
               the
               Church
               .
            
             
               The
               Triall
               of
               their
               estate
               is
               ,
               whereby
               we
               make
               diligent
               inquirie
               whether
               they
               be
               vnder
               the
               law
               ,
               or
               vnder
               grace
               .
            
             
               That
               this
               may
               manifestly
               appeare
               ,
               we
               
               must
               by
               asking
               of
               questions
               first
               draw
               out
               of
               them
               ,
               whether
               they
               be
               displeased
               with
               themselues
               ,
               because
               they
               haue
               displeased
               God
               ,
               that
               is
               to
               say
               ,
               whether
               they
               hate
               sinne
               as
               it
               is
               sinne
               :
               which
               is
               the
               foundation
               of
               repentance
               vnto
               saluation
               .
               Secondly
               ,
               we
               must
               demaund
               of
               them
               ,
               whether
               they
               haue
               or
               doe
               feele
               in
               their
               heart
               a
               desire
               to
               be
               reconciled
               with
               God
               ,
               which
               is
               the
               ground
               of
               a
               liuely
               faith
               .
            
             
               When
               Triall
               is
               made
               ,
               the
               Remedie
               must
               be
               applied
               vnto
               them
               out
               of
               the
               Gospell
               ,
               which
               is
               double
               .
               First
               ,
               some
               euangelicall
               meditations
               are
               to
               bee
               often
               inculcated
               and
               pressed
               vpon
               them
               :
               as
               1.
               
               That
               their
               sinne
               is
               pardonable
               .
               2.
               
               That
               the
               promises
               are
               generall
               in
               respect
               of
               beleeuers
               ,
               and
               that
               they
               are
               indefinite
               in
               respect
               of
               particular
               men
               ,
               and
               doe
               exclude
               no
               man.
               3.
               
               That
               the
               will
               to
               beleeue
               is
               faith
               ,
               Psalm
               .
               145.
               19.
               
               Reuel
               .
               21.
               6.
               4.
               
               That
               sinne
               doth
               not
               abolish
               grace
               ,
               but
               rather
               (
               God
               turning
               all
               things
               vnto
               the
               good
               of
               those
               that
               are
               his
               )
               doth
               illustrate
               it
               .
               5.
               
               That
               all
               the
               works
               of
               God
               are
               done
               by
               contrarie
               meanes
               .
               Secondly
               ,
               they
               must
               be
               intreated
               to
               stirre
               vp
               in
               them
               in
               the
               very
               bitternes
               of
               
               the
               temptation
               ,
               their
               faith
               which
               hath
               lien
               in
               a
               swoune
               ,
               and
               bin
               *
               couered
               (
               as
               it
               were
               with
               ashes
               )
               and
               that
               they
               would
               certainely
               set
               downe
               with
               themselues
               that
               their
               sinnes
               are
               forgiuen
               them
               ,
               and
               that
               it
               would
               please
               them
               to
               struggle
               manfully
               in
               prayer
               either
               alone
               or
               with
               others
               against
               carnall
               sense
               and
               humane
               hope
               .
               And
               that
               they
               may
               performe
               these
               things
               ,
               they
               must
               be
               very
               earnestly
               beaten
               vpon
               ,
               and
               those
               that
               are
               vnwilling
               must
               in
               a
               manner
               bee
               constrained
               .
               Psalm
               .
               130.
               1.
               
               
                 Out
                 of
                 the
                 depths
                 haue
                 I
                 called
                 to
                 thee
                 ,
                 O
                 Lord.
                 2.
                 
                 Lord
                 listen
                 vnto
                 my
                 voyce
                 :
                 let
                 thine
                 eares
                 attend
                 to
                 the
                 voice
                 of
                 my
                 praiers
                 .
              
               Psalm
               .
               77.
               1.
               
               
                 My
                 voice
                 came
                 to
                 God
                 when
                 I
                 prayed
                 ,
                 my
                 voice
                 went
                 to
                 God
                 ,
                 that
                 hee
                 would
                 turne
                 his
                 eare
              
               (
               vt
               aduertat
               aurem
               )
               
                 vnto
                 me
                 .
                 2.
                 
                 In
                 the
                 day
                 of
                 my
                 distresse
                 I
                 besought
                 the
                 Lord.
              
               Rom.
               4.
               18.
               
               
                 Who
                 (
                 Abraham
                 )
                 against
              
               (
               
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
                 〈◊〉
              
               )
               
                 hope
                 beleeued
                 vnder
                 hope
                 ,
                 that
                 he
                 should
                 be
                 the
                 father
                 of
                 many
                 nations
                 .
              
            
             
               Now
               that
               these
               medicines
               may
               be
               of
               force
               ,
               that
               ministeriall
               power
               of
               binding
               and
               loosing
               is
               to
               be
               vsed
               according
               to
               the
               forme
               prescribed
               in
               the
               word
               .
               2.
               
               Sam.
               12.
               
               13.
               
               
                 Then
                 Dauid
                 saidto
                 Nathan
                 ,
                 I
                 haue
                 sinned
                 against
                 the
                 Lord
                 :
                 Wherefore
                 Nathan
                 saied
                 to
                 Dauid
                 ,
                 Godhath
                 also
                 forgiuen
                 thy
                 sinne
                 :
                 thou
                 shalt
                 not
                 dye
                 .
              
               2.
               
               Cor.
               5.
               20.
               
               
                 Therefore
                 wee
                 are
                 Embassadours
                 in
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 Christ
                 ,
                 God
                 as
                 it
                 were
                 beseeching
                 you
                 by
                 vs
                 :
                 Wee
                 pray
                 you
                 in
                 the
                 name
                 of
                 Christ
                 that
                 yee
                 would
                 be
                 reconciled
                 to
                 God.
              
               And
               if
               perhaps
               Melancholie
               trouble
               the
               minde
               ,
               the
               helpe
               of
               the
               medicine
               must
               be
               in
               priuate
               sought
               for
               .
            
             
               
                 Falling
                 in
                 manners
                 is
              
               ,
               when
               any
               faithfull
               man
               falleth
               to
               the
               committing
               of
               some
               actuall
               sinne
               in
               life
               .
               As
               Noahs
               drunkennesse
               ,
               Dauids
               adulterie
               ,
               Peters
               deniall
               &c.
               
            
             
               To
               those
               that
               are
               fallen
               thus
               ,
               forsomuch
               as
               grace
               
                 remaining
                 in
                 respect
                 of
                 her
                 vertue
                 and
                 habit
              
               may
               be
               lost
               for
               a
               time
               in
               
                 respect
                 of
                 sense
                 and
                 working
              
               ;
               the
               Law
               must
               bee
               propounded
               being
               mixed
               with
               the
               Gospell
               :
               because
               a
               new
               acte
               of
               sinne
               requires
               a
               new
               acte
               (
               or
               worke
               )
               of
               faith
               and
               repentance
               .
               Isa.
               1.
               4.
               
               
                 Ah
                 ,
                 sinfull
                 nation
                 ,
                 a
              
               
               
                 people
                 laden
                 with
                 iniquitie
                 ,
                 a
                 seede
                 of
                 the
                 wicked
                 ,
                 corrupt
                 children
                 :
                 they
                 haue
                 forsaken
                 the
                 Lord
                 :
                 they
                 haue
                 prouoked
                 the
                 holy
                 one
                 of
                 Israel
                 to
                 anger
                 ,
                 they
                 are
                 gone
                 backeward
                 .
              
               
               16.
               
               
                 Wash
                 you
                 ,
                 make
                 you
                 cleane
                 ,
                 take
                 away
                 the
                 euill
                 of
                 your
                 works
                 from
                 before
                 mine
                 eyes
                 ,
                 &c.
                 18.
                 
                 Come
                 now
                 ,
                 and
                 let
                 vs
                 reason
                 together
                 ,
                 saith
                 the
                 Lord
                 ;
                 Though
                 your
                 sinnes
                 were
                 as
                 crimsin
                 ,
                 they
                 shall
                 bee
                 made
                 white
                 as
                 snow
                 :
                 though
                 they
                 were
                 red
                 like
                 skarlet
                 ,
                 they
                 shall
                 be
                 as
                 wooll
                 .
              
            
          
           
             
               VII
               .
               There
               is
               a
               mingled
               people
               .
            
             
               
                 Amixt
                 people
              
               are
               the
               assemblies
               of
               our
               Churches
               .
               To
               these
               any
               doctrine
               may
               be
               propounded
               ,
               whether
               of
               the
               Law
               or
               of
               the
               Gospell
               :
               if
               the
               *
               limitation
               and
               circumscription
               of
               the
               doctrine
               be
               made
               to
               those
               persons
               ,
               for
               whom
               it
               is
               conuenient
               .
               Iohn
               7.
               37.
               
               
                 Now
                 in
                 the
                 last
                 and
                 great
                 day
                 of
                 the
                 Feast
                 ,
                 Iesus
                 stoode
                 and
                 cried
                 ,
                 saying
                 ,
                 If
                 any
                 man
                 thirst
                 let
                 him
                 come
                 vnto
                 mee
                 and
                 drinke
                 .
              
               And
               this
               was
               the
               manner
               of
               the
               Prophets
               in
               their
               Sermons
               ,
               to
               denounce
               iudgements
               and
               destruction
               to
               the
               wicked
               :
               and
               to
               promise
               deliuerance
               in
               the
               Messias
               to
               those
               that
               do
               repent
               .
               A
               *
               doubt
               .
               If
               any
               man
               shall
               despaire
               in
               the
               publike
               congregation
               ,
               when
               the
               rest
               are
               hardened
               ,
               what
               ought
               to
               be
               done
               ?
               *
               Ans.
               Let
               those
               
               that
               are
               hardened
               ,
               heare
               the
               Law
               circumscribed
               within
               the
               limits
               of
               the
               persons
               ,
               and
               of
               the
               vices
               :
               and
               let
               the
               afflicted
               conscience
               heare
               the
               voyce
               of
               the
               Gospell
               applied
               in
               speciall
               manner
               vnto
               it
               .
            
          
        
         
           
             CHAP.
             VIII
             .
          
           
             
               Of
               the
               kinds
               of
               Application
               .
            
          
           
             APplication
             is
             either
             *
             Mentall
             or
             *
             Practicall
             .
          
           
             Mentall
             is
             that
             ,
             which
             respecteth
             the
             minde
             :
             and
             it
             is
             either
             doctrine
             or
             *
             Redargution
             .
             2.
             
             Tim.
             3.
             16.
             
             
               The
               whole
               Scripture
               is
               giuen
               by
               Gods
               inspiration
               ,
               and
               is
               profitable
               for
               doctrine
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               for
               Redargution
               or
               improouing
            
             ,
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               for
               correction
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               and
               for
               instruction
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               in
               righteousnesse
               .
               17.
               
               That
               the
               man
               of
               God
               may
               be
               perfect
               ,
               being
               perfectly
               instructed
               vnto
               euery
               good
               worke
               .
            
          
           
             Doctrine
             is
             that
             ,
             whereby
             doctrine
             (
             or
             teaching
             )
             is
             vsed
             for
             the
             information
             of
             the
             minde
             to
             a
             right
             iudgement
             concerning
             things
             to
             be
             beleeued
             .
          
           
           
             Redargution
             is
             that
             ,
             whereby
             teaching
             is
             vsed
             for
             the
             reformation
             of
             the
             minde
             from
             error
             .
          
           
             In
             confutations
             ,
             which
             are
             made
             publikely
             before
             the
             assembly
             ,
             these
             cautions
             must
             be
             vsed
             .
             1.
             
             The
             thing
             that
             is
             determined
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             or
             the
             state
             of
             the
             question
             that
             is
             to
             bee
             discussed
             must
             bee
             throughly
             vnderstood
             .
             2.
             
             Let
             those
             errors
             onely
             be
             reprooued
             ,
             which
             trouble
             the
             Church
             ,
             in
             which
             we
             liue
             :
             all
             other
             being
             altogether
             let
             alone
             ,
             which
             doe
             either
             lie
             dead
             ,
             or
             are
             externall
             :
             vnlesse
             some
             daunger
             bee
             readie
             to
             ensue
             of
             them
             .
             Matth.
             16.
             
             
               Beware
               of
               the
               leauen
               of
               the
               Pharisees
               and
               Saduces
               .
            
             Mark.
             9.
             
             
               Take
               heede
               ,
               and
               beware
               of
               the
               leauen
               of
               Herod
               .
            
             Reue.
             2.
             
             The
             men
             of
             Pergamus
             are
             warned
             to
             beware
             of
             the
             Nicolaitans
             ,
             to
             whom
             some
             of
             them
             did
             assent
             .
             3.
             
             If
             the
             error
             be
             out
             of
             the
             foundation
             of
             faith
             ,
             the
             confutation
             must
             not
             onely
             be
             Christianlike
             ,
             as
             it
             should
             be
             euer
             :
             but
             also
             a
             friendly
             ,
             a
             gentle
             and
             brotherly
             dissention
             .
          
           
             
               Practicall
               application
            
             is
             that
             which
             respecteth
             the
             life
             and
             behauiour
             .
             And
             it
             is
             instruction
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             and
             correction
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
           
             Instruction
             is
             that
             ,
             whereby
             doctrine
             is
             applied
             to
             frame
             a
             man
             to
             liue
             well
             in
             the
             *
             family
             ,
             common-wealth
             ,
             and
             Church
             .
             To
             this
             place
             belong
             consolation
             and
             exhortation
             .
             Rom.
             15.
             4.
             
          
           
             Correction
             is
             that
             ,
             wherby
             the
             doctrine
             is
             applied
             to
             reforme
             the
             life
             from
             vngodlines
             and
             vnrighteous
             dealing
             .
             Hitherto
             belongs
             admonition
             .
             This
             must
             be
             done
             ,
             first
             generally
             ,
             the
             circumstances
             of
             the
             persons
             being
             omitted
             .
             2.
             
             Sam.
             12.
             
             Nathan
             brings
             Dauid
             to
             the
             knowledge
             of
             his
             sinne
             by
             the
             helpe
             of
             a
             generall
             parable
             .
             Act.
             19.
             26.
             
             
               Ye
               see
               and
               heare
               ,
               that
               not
               onely
               at
               Ephesus
               ,
               but
               almost
               throughout
               all
               Asia
               ,
               this
               Paul
               hath
               perswaded
               and
               turned
               away
               much
               people
               (
               because
               he
               saith
               that
               those
               are
               not
               Gods
               which
               are
               made
               with
               hands
               .
               )
               35.
               
               Then
               the
               Towne
               Clerke
               ,
               when
               hee
               had
               stayed
               the
               people
               ,
               said
               ,
               Ye
               men
               of
               Ephesus
               ,
               &c.
               37.
               
               Ye
               haue
               brought
               hither
               these
               men
               ,
               which
               haue
               neither
               committed
               sacriledge
               ,
               neither
               [
               doe
               blaspheme
               ]
               your
               goddesse
               .
            
             Afterwards
             ,
             if
             the
             former
             reproofe
             preuaile
             not
             ,
             it
             must
             be
             vrged
             after
             a
             more
             speciall
             manner
             .
             1.
             
             Tim.
             5.
             20.
             
             
               Them
               that
               sinne
               ,
               rebuke
               openly
               ,
               that
               the
               rest
               may
               also
               
               feare
               .
            
             But
             alwaies
             ,
             in
             the
             very
             hatred
             of
             sinne
             ,
             let
             the
             loue
             of
             the
             person
             appeare
             in
             the
             speeches
             :
             and
             let
             the
             Minister
             include
             himselfe
             (
             if
             he
             may
             )
             in
             his
             reprehension
             ,
             that
             it
             may
             bee
             more
             milde
             and
             gentle
             .
             Dan.
             4.
             16.
             
             
               Then
               Daniel
               —
               said
               ,
               My
               Lord
               ,
               the
               dreame
               be
               to
               them
               that
               hate
               thee
               ,
               and
               the
               interpretation
               thereof
               to
               thine
               enemies
               .
               17.
               
               The
               tree
               ,
               which
               thou
               sawest
               —
               it
               is
               thou
               ,
            
             19.
             
             Gal.
             2.
             15.
             
             
               We
               that
               are
               Iewes
               by
               nature
               ,
               and
               not
               sinners
               of
               the
               Gentiles
               .
            
             1.
             
             Cor.
             4.
             6.
             
             
               These
               things
               ,
               Brethren
               ,
               I
               haue
               by
               a
               kinde
               of
               figure
               translated
               to
               my selfe
               ,
               and
               to
               Apollo
               for
               you
               ,
               that
               yee
               might
               learne
               by
               vs
               not
               to
               be
               wise
               aboue
               that
               which
               is
               written
               .
            
          
           
             Now
             these
             foure
             kinds
             of
             application
             doe
             offer
             themselues
             in
             euery
             sentence
             of
             the
             Scripture
             .
             I
             will
             also
             set
             downe
             that
             example
             ,
             which
             Illyricus
             hath
             propounded
             .
          
           
             
               
                 
                   
                     Illyricus
                     in
                     his
                     booke
                     of
                     the
                     way
                     to
                     vnderstand
                     the
                     Scriptures
                     .
                     Tract
                     .
                     1.
                     
                  
                   
                     
                       
                         Matth.
                         10.
                         28.
                         
                      
                       
                         Feare
                         yee
                         not
                         them
                         which
                         kill
                         the
                         bodie
                         ,
                         but
                         are
                         not
                         able
                         to
                         kill
                         the
                         
                         soule
                         :
                         but
                         rather
                         feare
                         him
                         ,
                         which
                         is
                         able
                         to
                         destroy
                         both
                         soule
                         and
                         bodie
                         in
                         hell
                         .
                         29.
                         
                         Are
                         not
                         two
                         Sparrowes
                         sold
                         for
                         a
                         farthing
                         ,
                         and
                         one
                         of
                         them
                         shall
                         not
                         fall
                         on
                         the
                         ground
                         without
                         your
                         Father
                         ?
                         30.
                         
                         Yea
                         ,
                         and
                         all
                         the
                         haires
                         of
                         your
                         head
                         are
                         numbred
                         .
                         31.
                         
                         Feare
                         yee
                         not
                         therefore
                         ,
                         yee
                         are
                         of
                         more
                         value
                         than
                         many
                         Sparrowes
                         .
                      
                    
                  
                   
                     
                       It
                       were
                       easie
                       to
                       draw
                       from
                       hence
                       many
                       doctrines
                       :
                       partly
                       of
                       the
                       confession
                       of
                       the
                       faith
                       :
                       and
                       partly
                       concerning
                       (
                       Gods
                       )
                       prouidence
                       .
                    
                     
                       *
                       Doctrine
                       1.
                       
                       That
                       it
                       is
                       needfull
                       for
                       vs
                       publikely
                       to
                       professe
                       the
                       doctrine
                       which
                       we
                       know
                       ,
                       so
                       often
                       as
                       there
                       is
                       need
                       .
                       2.
                       
                       That
                       wee
                       must
                       make
                       confession
                       also
                       with
                       the
                       hazzard
                       of
                       goods
                       and
                       life
                       .
                       3.
                       
                       That
                       our
                       life
                       should
                       bee
                       contemned
                       in
                       comparison
                       of
                       Christ
                       and
                       his
                       trueth
                       .
                       4.
                       
                       That
                       eternall
                       punishments
                       to
                       be
                       suffered
                       both
                       in
                       soule
                       and
                       bodie
                       are
                       prepared
                       for
                       those
                       that
                       are
                       not
                       affraid
                       to
                       denie
                       Christ
                       ,
                       and
                       his
                       trueth
                       .
                       5.
                       
                       That
                       God
                       is
                       intent
                       and
                       readie
                       to
                       gouerne
                       vs
                       ,
                       that
                       we
                       might
                       make
                       our
                       confession
                       aright
                       .
                       6.
                       
                       That
                       the
                       prouidence
                       of
                       
                       God
                       is
                       not
                       onely
                       generall
                       ,
                       but
                       also
                       speciall
                       ,
                       which
                       is
                       diligently
                       occupied
                       about
                       all
                       our
                       smallest
                       matters
                       ,
                       yea
                       euen
                       the
                       haires
                       of
                       our
                       head
                       .
                    
                     
                       *
                       Redargution
                       .
                       1.
                       
                       Those
                       doe
                       erre
                       ,
                       who
                       thinke
                       it
                       to
                       bee
                       sufficient
                       ,
                       if
                       in
                       heart
                       they
                       doe
                       embrace
                       the
                       faith
                       and
                       a
                       right
                       opinion
                       concerning
                       religion
                       :
                       and
                       that
                       it
                       is
                       at
                       a
                       mans
                       choise
                       in
                       the
                       meane
                       season
                       to
                       graunt
                       or
                       affirme
                       any
                       thing
                       before
                       men
                       ,
                       as
                       the
                       condition
                       of
                       the
                       place
                       ,
                       time
                       ,
                       and
                       persons
                       requireth
                       ;
                       especially
                       when
                       the
                       life
                       seemeth
                       to
                       be
                       in
                       imminent
                       danger
                       to
                       be
                       lost
                       .
                       2.
                       
                       The
                       Epicures
                       erre
                       ,
                       in
                       that
                       they
                       denie
                       the
                       diuine
                       prouidence
                       :
                       because
                       they
                       thinke
                       it
                       too
                       base
                       for
                       the
                       Maiestie
                       of
                       God
                       to
                       take
                       care
                       of
                       humane
                       affaires
                       .
                       3.
                       
                       The
                       Stoicks
                       doe
                       erre
                       ,
                       who
                       imagine
                       that
                       all
                       things
                       are
                       gouerned
                       by
                       the
                       fate
                       ,
                       (
                       or
                       an
                       vnresistable
                       &
                       violent
                       necessitie
                       .
                       )
                       4.
                       
                       They
                       doe
                       erre
                       who
                       make
                       chaunce
                       and
                       fortune
                       ,
                       without
                       any
                       wise
                       ordination
                       of
                       the
                       diuine
                       prouidence
                       .
                       5.
                       
                       The
                       Pelagians
                       do
                       erre
                       in
                       giuing
                       more
                       than
                       is
                       due
                       to
                       mans
                       strength
                       ,
                       as
                       if
                       it
                       were
                       put
                       in
                       mens
                       power
                       to
                       embrace
                       the
                       faith
                       at
                       their
                       pleasure
                       ,
                       to
                       continue
                       constant
                       in
                       the
                       same
                       ,
                       and
                       to
                       confesse
                       
                       it
                       to
                       the
                       end
                       without
                       feare
                       .
                       6.
                       
                       They
                       doe
                       erre
                       ,
                       who
                       doe
                       leane
                       more
                       vpon
                       outward
                       things
                       and
                       inconstant
                       riches
                       ,
                       than
                       vpon
                       the
                       power
                       and
                       goodnesse
                       of
                       God.
                       
                    
                     
                       *
                       Instruction
                       .
                       1.
                       
                       Thou
                       must
                       to
                       the
                       vtmost
                       of
                       thy
                       power
                       labour
                       to
                       haue
                       the
                       true
                       feare
                       of
                       God
                       before
                       thine
                       eyes
                       :
                       because
                       thou
                       now
                       hearest
                       that
                       one
                       God
                       is
                       to
                       be
                       feared
                       aboue
                       all
                       men
                       .
                    
                     
                       2.
                       
                       Thou
                       must
                       learne
                       such
                       a
                       contempt
                       of
                       humane
                       things
                       ,
                       as
                       that
                       thou
                       maist
                       alwaies
                       desire
                       ,
                       hauing
                       forsaken
                       them
                       ,
                       to
                       depart
                       hence
                       ,
                       and
                       to
                       bee
                       ioyned
                       together
                       with
                       Christ
                       in
                       the
                       heauens
                       .
                       3.
                       
                       The
                       consideration
                       of
                       (
                       Gods
                       )
                       speciall
                       prouidence
                       doth
                       cause
                       thee
                       to
                       thinke
                       of
                       the
                       presence
                       of
                       God
                       that
                       Beholder
                       ,
                       to
                       craue
                       his
                       helpe
                       ,
                       and
                       also
                       to
                       beleeue
                       that
                       thou
                       art
                       helped
                       in
                       all
                       things
                       ,
                       and
                       finally
                       that
                       there
                       is
                       no
                       danger
                       so
                       terrible
                       ,
                       but
                       hee
                       both
                       can
                       and
                       will
                       deliuer
                       thee
                       from
                       ,
                       when
                       it
                       is
                       fit
                       .
                    
                     
                       *
                       Correction
                       .
                       1.
                       
                       These
                       words
                       of
                       Christ
                       correct
                       their
                       negligence
                       ,
                       who
                       in
                       their
                       prayers
                       do
                       not
                       craue
                       of
                       God
                       sincere
                       loue
                       ,
                       that
                       being
                       inflamed
                       with
                       it
                       they
                       may
                       not
                       refuse
                       to
                       lay
                       downe
                       their
                       life
                       for
                       his
                       name
                       .
                       2.
                       
                       The
                       negligence
                       of
                       those
                       men
                       is
                       also
                       
                       taxed
                       ,
                       which
                       doe
                       not
                       acknowledge
                       and
                       behold
                       the
                       prouidence
                       of
                       God
                       shewing
                       it selfe
                       in
                       all
                       things
                       .
                       3.
                       
                       Those
                       are
                       reproued
                       ,
                       who
                       giue
                       not
                       God
                       thanks
                       for
                       vouchsafing
                       to
                       gouerne
                       and
                       defend
                       vs
                       and
                       all
                       things
                       that
                       belong
                       vnto
                       vs
                       by
                       his
                       prouidence
                       .
                       4.
                       
                       Those
                       are
                       reprooued
                       ,
                       that
                       abuse
                       the
                       good
                       creatures
                       of
                       God
                       ,
                       seeing
                       that
                       it
                       is
                       manifest
                       that
                       God
                       hath
                       care
                       of
                       all
                       things
                       .
                    
                     
                       Thus
                       any
                       place
                       of
                       Scripture
                       ought
                       to
                       be
                       handled
                       :
                       yet
                       so
                       as
                       that
                       all
                       the
                       doctrins
                       be
                       not
                       propounded
                       to
                       the
                       people
                       ,
                       but
                       those
                       onely
                       ,
                       which
                       may
                       bee
                       fitly
                       applied
                       to
                       our
                       times
                       and
                       to
                       the
                       present
                       condition
                       of
                       the
                       Church
                       .
                       And
                       they
                       must
                       not
                       onely
                       be
                       choice
                       ones
                       ,
                       but
                       also
                       few
                       ,
                       lest
                       the
                       hearers
                       bee
                       ouercharged
                       with
                       their
                       multitude
                       .
                    
                  
                
              
            
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             IX
             .
          
           
             
               Of
               Memorie
               in
               Preaching
               .
            
          
           
             BBecause
             it
             is
             the
             receiued
             custom
             for
             Preachers
             to
             speak
             *
             
               by
               heart
            
             before
             the
             people
             ,
             some
             thing
             must
             bee
             here
             annexed
             concerning
             memory
             .
          
           
             Artificial
             memorie
             ,
             which
             standeth
             vpon
             places
             and
             images
             ,
             will
             very
             easilie
             without
             labour
             teach
             how
             to
             commit
             sermons
             to
             the
             memorie
             :
             but
             it
             is
             not
             to
             be
             approoued
             .
             1.
             
             The
             animation
             of
             the
             image
             ,
             which
             is
             the
             key
             of
             memory
             ,
             is
             impious
             ;
             because
             it
             requireth
             absurd
             ,
             insolent
             and
             prodigious
             cogitations
             ,
             and
             those
             especially
             ,
             which
             set
             an
             edge
             vpon
             and
             kindle
             the
             most
             corrupt
             affections
             of
             the
             flesh
             .
             2.
             
             It
             dulleth
             wit
             and
             memorie
             ,
             because
             it
             requireth
             a
             threefold
             memorie
             for
             one
             :
             the
             first
             of
             the
             places
             :
             the
             second
             of
             the
             images
             :
             the
             third
             of
             the
             thing
             that
             is
             to
             be
             declared
             .
          
           
           
             It
             is
             not
             therefore
             an
             vnprofitable
             aduise
             ,
             if
             he
             that
             is
             to
             preach
             doe
             diligentlie
             imprint
             in
             his
             mind
             by
             the
             helpe
             of
             dsposition
             either
             axiomaticall
             ,
             or
             syllogisticall
             ,
             or
             methodicall
             the
             seuerall
             doctrines
             of
             the
             place
             he
             meanes
             to
             handle
             ,
             the
             seuerall
             proofes
             and
             applications
             of
             the
             doctrines
             ,
             the
             illustrations
             of
             the
             applications
             ,
             and
             the
             order
             of
             them
             all
             :
             in
             the
             meane
             time
             nothing
             carefull
             for
             the
             words
             ,
             Which
             (
             as
             Horace
             speaketh
             )
             
               will
               not
               vnwillingly
               follow
               the
               matter
               that
               is
               premeditated
               .
               Uerbaque
               praeuisam
               rem
               non
               inuita
               sequentur
               .
            
          
           
             Their
             studie
             hath
             many
             discommodities
             ,
             who
             doe
             con
             their
             written
             sermons
             word
             for
             word
             .
             1.
             
             It
             asketh
             great
             labour
             .
             2.
             
             He
             which
             through
             feare
             doth
             stumble
             at
             one
             word
             ,
             doth
             both
             trouble
             the
             congregation
             ,
             and
             confound
             his
             memorie
             .
             3.
             
             Pronunciation
             ,
             action
             ,
             and
             the
             holie
             motions
             of
             affections
             are
             hindred
             ;
             because
             the
             mind
             is
             wholly
             bent
             on
             this
             ,
             to
             wit
             ,
             that
             the
             memorie
             fainting
             now
             vnder
             her
             burthen
             may
             not
             faile
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             X.
             
          
           
             HItherto
             hath
             bin
             spoken
             of
             the
             preparation
             or
             prouision
             of
             the
             sermon
             :
             the
             
               Promulgation
               or
               vttring
            
             of
             it
             followeth
             .
          
           
             In
             the
             Promulgation
             two
             things
             are
             required
             :
             the
             hiding
             of
             humane
             wisedome
             ,
             and
             the
             demonstration
             (
             or
             shewing
             )
             of
             the
             spirit
             .
          
           
             
               Humane
               wisedome
            
             must
             bee
             concealed
             ,
             whether
             it
             be
             in
             the
             matter
             of
             the
             sermon
             ,
             or
             in
             the
             setting
             forth
             of
             the
             words
             :
             because
             the
             preaching
             of
             the
             word
             is
             the
             
               Testimonie
               of
               God
               ,
               and
               the
               profession
               of
               the
               knowledge
               of
               Christ
               ,
            
             and
             not
             of
             humane
             skill
             :
             and
             againe
             ,
             because
             the
             hearers
             ought
             not
             to
             ascribe
             their
             faith
             to
             the
             gifts
             of
             men
             ,
             but
             to
             the
             power
             of
             Gods
             word
             .
             1.
             
             Cor.
             2.
             1.
             
             
               When
               I
               came
               vnto
               you
               brethren
               ,
               I
               came
               not
               with
               the
               eminencie
               of
               eloquence
               or
               of
               wisdome
               ,
               declaring
               vnto
               you
               the
               testimonie
               of
               God.
               2.
               
               For
               I
               did
               not
               decree
               
               to
               know
               any
               thing
               among
               you
               but
               Iesus
               Christ
               ,
               and
               him
               crucified
               .
               5.
               
               That
               your
               faith
               should
               not
               consist
               in
               the
               wisedome
               of
               men
               ,
               but
               in
               the
               power
               of
               God.
               
            
          
           
             If
             any
             man
             thinke
             that
             by
             this
             meanes
             barbarisme
             should
             bee
             brought
             into
             pulpits
             ;
             hee
             must
             vnderstand
             that
             the
             Minister
             may
             ,
             yea
             and
             must
             priuatly
             vse
             at
             his
             libertie
             the
             artes
             ,
             philosophie
             ,
             and
             varietie
             of
             reading
             ,
             whilest
             he
             is
             in
             framing
             his
             sermon
             :
             but
             he
             ought
             in
             publike
             to
             conceale
             all
             these
             from
             the
             people
             ,
             and
             not
             to
             make
             the
             least
             oftentation
             .
             
               Artis
               etiam
               est
               celare
               artem
               ;
               it
               is
               also
               a
               point
               of
               Art
               to
               conceale
               Art.
               
            
          
           
             The
             Demonstration
             of
             the
             spirit
             is
             ,
             when
             as
             the
             Minister
             of
             the
             word
             doth
             in
             the
             time
             of
             preaching
             so
             behaue
             himselfe
             ,
             that
             all
             ,
             euen
             ignorant
             persons
             &
             vnbeleeuers
             may
             iudge
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             so
             much
             hee
             that
             speaketh
             ,
             as
             the
             Spirit
             of
             God
             in
             him
             and
             by
             him
             .
             1.
             
             Cor.
             2.
             4.
             
             
               Neither
               was
               my
               speech
               and
               my
               preaching
               in
               the
               perswasiue
               words
               of
               mans
               wisedome
               ,
               but
               in
               the
               demonstration
               of
               the
               spirit
               and
               of
               power
               .
            
             And
             14.
             42.
             
             
               If
               all
               prophecie
               ,
               and
               there
               enter
               in
               an
               vnbeleeuer
               ,
               or
               one
               that
               is
               ignorant
               ,
               hee
               is
               reprooued
               
               of
               all
               ,
               be
               is
               iudged
               of
               all
               .
               25.
               
               And
               so
               the
               secrets
               of
               his
               hart
               are
               disclosed
               ,
               &
               so
               falling
               vpon
               his
               face
               ,
               he
               willworship
               God
               ,
               returning
               word
               that
               God
               indeed
               is
               amōg
               you
               .
            
             And
             4.
             19.
             
             
               I
               wil
               come
               vnto
               you
               shortly
               —
               and
               I
               wil
               know
               not
               their
            
             *
             
               words
               that
               are
               puffed
               vp
               ,
               but
               their
               power
               .
               20.
               
               For
               the
               kingdome
               of
               God
               is
               not
               in
               words
               but
               in
               power
               .
            
             Mich.
             3.
             8.
             
             
               I
               am
               filled
               with
               power
               by
               the
               spirit
               of
               the
               Lord
               ,
               and
               with
               iudgement
               and
               might
               to
               shew
               Iacob
               his
               defection
               ,
               and
               to
               Israel
               his
               sinne
               .
            
             This
             makes
             the
             ministerie
             to
             bee
             liuely
             and
             powerfull
             .
             Luk.
             11.
             27.
             
             
               And
               it
               came
               to
               passe
               ,
               when
               he
               had
               spoken
               these
               things
               ,
               that
               a
               certaine
               woman
               of
               the
               multitude
               lifting
               vp
               her
               voyce
               said
               vnto
               him
               ,
               Blessed
               is
               the
               wombe
               that
               bare
               thee
               ,
               and
               the
               breasts
               that
               gaue
               thee
               sucke
               .
            
          
           
             This
             demonstration
             is
             either
             in
             speech
             or
             in
             gesture
             .
          
           
             The
             speech
             must
             be
             spirituall
             and
             gracious
             .
          
           
             That
             speech
             is
             spirituall
             ,
             which
             the
             holy
             Spirit
             doth
             teach
             .
             1.
             
             Cor.
             2.
             13.
             
             
               Which
               things
               also
               we
               speake
               ,
               not
               in
               the
               words
               ,
               which
               mans
               wisedome
               teacheth
               ,
               but
               which
               the
               holy
               Ghost
               teacheth
               ,
               comparing
               spirituall
               things
               
               with
               spirituall
               things
               .
            
             And
             it
             is
             a
             speech
             both
             simple
             and
             perspicuous
             fit
             both
             for
             the
             peoples
             vnderstanding
             and
             to
             expresse
             the
             maiestie
             of
             the
             spirit
             .
             Act.
             17.
             2.
             
             
               Paul
               disputed
               with
               them
               three
               sabbath
               dayes
               out
               of
               the
               Scriptures
               .
               3.
               
               Opening
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               and
               shewing
               that
               Christ
               must
               suffer
               and
               rise
               againe
               .
            
             Gal.
             3.
             1.
             
             
               O
               yee
               foolish
               Galatians
               :
               —
               to
               whom
               Iesus
               Christ
               before
               was
               described
               in
               your
               sight
               ,
               and
               among
               you
               crucified
               .
            
             2.
             
             Cor.
             4.
             2.
             
             
               But
               wee
               haue
               cast
               from
               vs
               the
               clokes
               of
               shame
               ,
               and
               walke
               not
               in
               craftines
               ,
               neither
               handle
               we
               the
               word
               of
               God
               deceitfullie
               :
               but
               in
               declaration
               of
               the
               trueth
               wee
               approoue
               our selues
               to
               euery
               mans
               conscience
               in
               the
               sight
               of
               God.
               3.
               
               If
               our
               Gospell
               be
               then
               hid
               ,
               it
               is
               hid
               to
               them
               that
               perish
               .
               4.
               
               In
               whom
               the
               God
               of
               this
               world
               hath
               blinded
               the
               mindes
               ,
               that
               is
               ,
               of
               the
               infidels
               .
               &c.
               
            
          
           
             Wherefore
             neither
             the
             words
             of
             arts
             ,
             nor
             Greeke
             and
             Latin
             phrases
             and
             quirks
             must
             bee
             intermingled
             in
             the
             sermon
             .
             1.
             
             They
             disturbe
             the
             mindes
             of
             the
             auditours
             ,
             that
             they
             cannot
             fit
             those
             things
             which
             went
             afore
             with
             those
             that
             follow
             .
             2.
             
             A
             strange
             word
             hindreth
             the
             vnderstanding
             of
             those
             things
             that
             are
             spoken
             .
             
             3.
             
             It
             drawes
             the
             mind
             away
             from
             the
             purpose
             to
             some
             other
             matter
             .
          
           
             Here
             also
             the
             telling
             of
             tales
             ,
             and
             all
             profane
             and
             ridiculous
             speeches
             must
             be
             omitted
             .
          
           
             The
             speech
             is
             gracious
             ,
             wherein
             the
             grace
             of
             the
             heart
             is
             expressed
             .
             Luk.
             4.
             22.
             
             
               And
               all
               bare
               witnes
               of
               him
               ,
               and
               wondred
               at
               the
               gracious
               words
               ,
               which
               proceeded
               out
               of
               his
               mouth
               .
            
             Iohn
             7.
             46.
             
             
               The
               Officers
               answered
               ,
               neuer
               man
               spake
               like
               this
               man.
               
            
          
           
             Grace
             is
             either
             of
             the
             Person
             ,
             or
             of
             the
             Ministerie
             .
          
           
             Grace
             of
             the
             person
             is
             the
             holines
             of
             the
             heart
             ,
             and
             an
             vnblameable
             life
             :
             Which
             howsoeuer
             it
             makes
             not
             a
             Minister
             ,
             yet
             is
             it
             very
             necessarie
             .
             1.
             
             Because
             the
             doctrine
             of
             the
             word
             is
             hard
             both
             to
             bee
             vnderstood
             and
             to
             bee
             practised
             ,
             therefore
             the
             Minister
             ought
             to
             expresse
             that
             by
             his
             example
             ,
             which
             he
             teacheth
             ,
             as
             it
             were
             by
             a
             type
             .
             1.
             
             Pet.
             5.
             3.
             
             
               Not
               as
               though
               yee
               were
               Lords
               ouer
               Gods
               heritage
               ,
               but
               that
               yee
               may
               be
               examples
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             types
             )
             
               to
               the
               flocke
            
             .
             1.
             
             Tim.
             4.
             12.
             
             
               Be
               an
               example
               to
               the
               faithfull
               ,
               both
               in
               word
               and
               conuersation
               .
            
             Phil.
             4.
             8.
             
             
               Furthermore
               ,
               brethren
               ,
               whatsoeuer
               things
               are
               true
               ,
               
               whatsoeuer
               things
               are
               honest
               —
               thinke
               on
               these
               things
               .
               9.
               
               Which
               yee
               haue
               both
               learned
               ,
               and
               receiued
               ,
               and
               heard
               ,
               and
               seene
               in
               me
               ,
               those
               things
               doe
               ,
               and
               the
               God
               of
               peace
               shall
               be
               with
               you
               .
            
             2.
             
             He
             that
             is
             not
             godly
             ,
             howsoeuer
             he
             may
             vnderstand
             the
             scriptures
             ,
             yet
             doth
             he
             not
             perceiue
             the
             inward
             sense
             and
             experience
             of
             the
             word
             in
             his
             heart
             .
             Psalm
             .
             25.
             8.
             
             
               The
               Lord
               is
               good
               and
               right
               ,
               therefore
               he
               teacheth
               sinners
               his
               way
               .
               9.
               
               He
               maketh
               the
               meeke
               to
               walke
               in
               the
               Law
               ,
               and
               teacheth
               the
               meeke
               his
               way
               .
            
             Amos
             3.
             7.
             
             
               Surely
               the
               Lord
               God
               will
               doe
               nothing
               ,
               but
               he
               reuealeth
               his
               secret
               to
               his
               seruants
               the
               Prophets
               .
            
             Gen.
             18.
             17.
             
             
               And
               the
               Lord
               said
               ,
               Shall
               I
               hide
               from
               Abraham
               the
               thing
               which
               I
               am
               about
               to
               do
               ?
               18.
               
               Seeing
               that
               Abraham
               shall
               be
               indeede
               the
               father
               of
               a
               great
               and
               mightie
               nation
               ,
               &c.
               29.
               
               For
               I
               know
               him
               that
               he
               will
               command
               his
               sonnes
               and
               his
               household
               after
               him
               ,
               that
               they
               keepe
               the
               way
               of
               the
               Lord
               to
               doe
               righteousnes
               and
               iudgement
               .
            
             3.
             
             It
             is
             a
             thing
             execrable
             in
             the
             sight
             of
             God
             that
             godly
             speech
             should
             bee
             conioyned
             with
             an
             vngodly
             life
             .
             Psalm
             .
             50.
             16.
             17.
             
             
               Vnto
               the
               wicked
               God
               saith
               ,
               what
               hast
               thou
               to
               doe
               to
               declare
               mine
               ordinances
               ,
               and
               to
               take
               my
               
               couenant
               into
               thy
               mouth
               ,
               seeing
               thou
               hatest
               to
               be
               reformed
               .
            
             It
             is
             a
             strange
             sight
             to
             see
             him
             ,
             that
             is
             the
             guide
             of
             the
             way
             to
             others
             ,
             to
             wander
             out
             of
             the
             way
             himselfe
             ,
             and
             to
             see
             a
             Physitian
             of
             others
             to
             be
             full
             of
             botches
             himselfe
             in
             the
             meane
             while
             ,
             as
             Nazianzene
             speaketh
             .
             4.
             
             It
             is
             an
             ecclesiasticall
             secret
             :
             
               That
               the
               Minister
               ought
               to
               couer
               his
               infirmities
               ,
               that
               they
               bee
               not
               seene
               .
            
             For
             the
             simple
             people
             behold
             not
             the
             ministerie
             ,
             but
             the
             person
             of
             y
             e
             Minister
             .
             Herod
             heard
             
               Iohn
               Baptist
            
             willingly
             ,
             not
             because
             hee
             was
             a
             
               good
               minister
            
             ,
             but
             because
             he
             was
             
               a
               good
               man.
            
             Mark.
             6.
             20.
             
             Well
             saith
             *
             
               Nazianzene
               ,
               He
               that
               teacheth
               sound
               doctrine
               ,
               and
               liues
               wickedly
               ,
               reacheth
               that
               with
               one
               hand
               ,
               which
               he
               cleeketh
               away
               with
               the
               other
               .
               Chrysostome
            
             vpon
             the
             25.
             of
             Matthew
             saith
             :
             
               The
               doctor
               of
               the
               Church
               by
               teaching
               well
               and
               by
               liuing
               wel
               instructeth
               the
               people
               how
               they
               ought
               to
               liue
               well
               :
               but
               by
               liuing
               ill
               he
               doth
               instruct
               God
               how
               to
               condemne
               him
               .
            
             And
             in
             his
             30.
             
             Hom.
             in
             Act.
             
               It
               is
               an
               easie
               matter
               to
               shew
               wisedome
               in
               words
               ,
               teach
               me
               to
               liue
               by
               thy
               life
               :
               this
               is
               the
               best
               teaching
               .
            
             For
             words
             make
             not
             such
             an
             impression
             in
             the
             soule
             as
             workes
             doe
             .
             
             5.
             
             A
             Minister
             ,
             that
             is
             wicked
             either
             openly
             or
             secretly
             ,
             is
             not
             worthie
             to
             stand
             before
             the
             face
             of
             the
             most
             holy
             ,
             and
             the
             almightie
             God.
             Ier.
             15.
             19.
             
             
               Therefore
               thus
               saith
               the
               Lord
               ,
               If
               thou
               returne
               ,
               then
               will
               I
               bring
               thee
               againe
               and
               thou
               shalt
               stand
               before
               me
               .
            
             Isai.
             6.
             6.
             
             
               Then
               flew
               one
               of
               the
               Seraphims
               vnto
               me
               with
               an
               hot
               coale
               in
               his
               hand
               ,
               which
               hee
               had
               taken
               from
               the
               Altar
               with
               the
               tongues
               .
               7.
               
               And
               hee
               touched
               my
               mouth
               and
               said
               ,
               Loe
               ,
               this
               hath
               touched
               thy
               lips
               ,
               and
               thine
               iniquitie
               shall
               bee
               taken
               away
               ,
               and
               thy
               sinne
               shall
               bee
               purged
               .
               8.
               
               Also
               I
               heard
               the
               voyce
               of
               the
               Lord
               ,
               saying
               ,
               Whom
               shall
               I
               send
               ?
               and
               who
               shall
               goe
               for
               vs
               ?
               Then
               I
               said
               ,
               Here
               am
               I
               ,
               send
               me
               .
            
             Leuit.
             10.
             3.
             
             
               Then
               Moses
               said
               to
               Aaron
               ,
               This
               is
               that
               which
               the
               Lord
               said
               ,
               I
               will
               be
               sanctified
               in
               them
               that
               come
               neere
               vnto
               me
               ,
               and
               I
               will
               bee
               glorified
               before
               the
               sight
               of
               all
               the
               people
               .
            
             And
             hence
             it
             is
             that
             the
             iudgements
             of
             God
             remaine
             for
             wicked
             Ministers
             to
             tremble
             at
             .
             1.
             
             Sam.
             2.
             17.
             
             
               Therefore
               the
               sinne
               of
               the
               young
               men
               was
               very
               great
               before
               the
               Lord
               :
               for
               men
               abhorred
               the
               offering
               of
               the
               Lord.
               &c.
            
             ver
             .
             25.
             
             
               They
               obeyed
               not
               the
               voyce
               of
               their
               father
               ,
               because
               the
               Lord
               meant
               to
               slay
               them
               .
            
          
           
           
             The
             parts
             of
             sanctitie
             are
             especially
             ,
             1.
             
             A
             good
             conscience
             .
             2.
             
             Cor.
             1.
             12.
             
             
               For
               our
               reioycing
               is
               this
               ,
               the
               testimonie
               of
               our
               conscience
               ,
               that
               in
               simplicitie
               and
               godly
               sinceritie
               ,
               and
               not
               in
               fleshly
               wisedome
               ,
               but
               by
               the
               grace
               of
               God
               ,
               wee
               haue
               had
               our
               conuersation
               in
               the
               world
               .
            
             1.
             
             Timothie
             1.
             19.
             
             
               Keeping
               faith
               and
               a
               good
               conscience
               ,
               which
               some
               hauing
               put
               away
               as
               concerning
               the
               faith
               haue
               made
               Ship-wreck
               .
            
             Act.
             24.
             16.
             
             
               And
               herein
               I
               endeauour
               my selfe
               to
               haue
               alway
               a
               cleere
               conscience
               towards
               God
               ,
               and
               towards
               men
               .
            
             If
             this
             bee
             wanting
             ,
             the
             mouth
             of
             the
             speaker
             is
             shut
             .
             Isai.
             56.
             10.
             
             
               Their
               Watchmen
               are
               all
               blind
               :
               they
               haue
               no
               knowledge
               ,
               they
               are
               all
               dumbe
               dogges
               ,
               they
               cannot
               barke
               ,
               they
               lie
               and
               sleepe
               ,
               and
               delight
               in
               sleeping
               .
            
             2.
             
             An
             inward
             feeling
             of
             the
             doctrine
             to
             be
             deliuered
             .
             Wood
             ,
             that
             is
             capable
             of
             fire
             ,
             doth
             not
             burne
             ,
             vnles
             fire
             be
             put
             to
             it
             :
             and
             he
             must
             first
             be
             godly
             affected
             himselfe
             ,
             who
             would
             stirre
             vp
             godly
             affections
             in
             other
             men
             .
             Therefore
             what
             motions
             a
             sermon
             doth
             require
             ,
             such
             the
             Preacher
             shall
             stirre
             vp
             priuatly
             in
             his
             owne
             mind
             ,
             that
             hee
             may
             kindle
             vp
             the
             same
             in
             his
             hearers
             .
             3.
             
             The
             feare
             of
             God
             ,
             
             whereby
             ,
             being
             throughly
             strucken
             with
             a
             reuerent
             regard
             of
             Gods
             Maiestie
             ,
             hee
             speaketh
             soberly
             and
             moderately
             .
             4.
             
             The
             loue
             of
             the
             people
             .
             1.
             
             Thess.
             27.
             
             
               But
               were
               gentle
               amōgst
               you
               ,
               as
               a
               nurse
               that
               cherisheth
               her
               children
               .
            
             And
             that
             this
             affection
             may
             appeare
             ,
             the
             Ministers
             dutie
             is
             to
             pray
             seriously
             and
             feruently
             for
             the
             people
             of
             God.
             1.
             
             Sam.
             12.
             23.
             
             
               God
               forbid
               that
               I
               should
               sin
               against
               the
               Lord
               and
               cease
               praying
               for
               you
               .
            
             5.
             
             The
             Minister
             must
             also
             be
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             venerable
             ,
             that
             is
             ,
             such
             a
             one
             as
             is
             to
             be
             reuerenced
             for
             constancie
             ,
             integritie
             ,
             grauitie
             and
             trueth-speaking
             ,
             who
             also
             knoweth
             how
             to
             performe
             reuerence
             to
             others
             either
             priuatly
             or
             publikely
             ,
             as
             is
             befitting
             the
             persons
             of
             all
             his
             hearers
             .
             6.
             
             Hee
             must
             bee
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             temperant
             ,
             who
             restraineth
             inwardly
             his
             ouer
             vehement
             affections
             ,
             and
             hath
             his
             outward
             fashions
             and
             gestures
             moderate
             and
             plaine
             ,
             by
             the
             which
             dignitie
             and
             authoritie
             may
             bee
             procured
             and
             preserued
             .
             Therefore
             hee
             must
             be
             neither
             couetous
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             a
             louer
             of
             siluer
             )
             nor
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             a
             follower
             of
             wine
             ,
             nor
             litigious
             ,
             nor
             a
             striker
             ,
             nor
             wrathfull
             :
             And
             let
             the
             young
             men
             exercise
             themselues
             
             to
             godlines
             ,
             and
             flie
             the
             lusts
             of
             youth
             .
             1.
             
             Tim.
             4.
             7.
             
          
           
             The
             grace
             of
             the
             ministerie
             is
             .
             1.
             to
             be
             apt
             to
             teach
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             1.
             
             Timothie
             3.
             2.
             
             Now
             Pauls
             meaning
             is
             ,
             that
             it
             is
             not
             only
             decent
             and
             laudable
             if
             this
             gift
             be
             had
             ,
             but
             also
             that
             it
             is
             so
             necessary
             ,
             as
             that
             may
             not
             be
             wanting
             .
             For
             this
             consideration
             Nazianzene
             refused
             a
             bishopricke
             :
             and
             Theophylact
             vpon
             this
             place
             saith
             ,
             that
             
               this
               dutie
               of
               teaching
               is
               especially
               of
               all
               other
               necessarie
               to
               be
               found
               in
               Bishops
               .
            
             In
             the
             Nicene
             and
             Miletian
             Councell
             ,
             this
             was
             imposed
             in
             stead
             of
             a
             punishment
             ,
             to
             hold
             the
             name
             of
             a
             Minister
             ,
             but
             not
             to
             preach
             the
             Gospell
             .
             2.
             
             Authoritie
             ,
             whereby
             he
             speaketh
             as
             the
             Embassadour
             of
             the
             great
             Iehouah
             .
             Tit.
             2.
             15.
             
             
               These
               things
               speake
               and
               exhort
               ,
               and
               rebuke
               with
               all
               authoritie
               .
            
             1.
             
             Pet.
             4.
             11.
             
             
               If
               any
               man
               speake
               ,
               let
               him
               speake
               as
               the
               oracles
               of
               God.
            
             3.
             
             Zeale
             ,
             whereby
             being
             most
             desirous
             of
             Gods
             glory
             he
             doth
             endeuour
             to
             fulfill
             and
             execute
             the
             decree
             of
             election
             concerning
             the
             saluation
             of
             men
             by
             his
             ministerie
             .
             Iob
             32.
             18.
             
             
               I
               an
               full
               of
               matter
               ,
               and
               the
               spirit
               within
               me
               compelleth
               me
               .
               16.
               
               Behold
               ,
               my
               
               bellie
               is
               as
               the
               wine
               which
               hath
               no
               vent
               ,
               and
               like
               the
               new
               bottels
               that
               brast
               .
            
             2.
             
             Tim.
             2.
             25.
             
             
               Instructing
               them
               —
               prouing
               if
               God
               at
               any
               time
               will
               giue
               them
               repentance
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               know
               the
               trueth
               .
            
             Col.
             1.
             28.
             29.
             
             
               Admonishing
               euery
               man
               —
               that
               wee
               may
               present
               euery
               man
               perfect
               in
               Christ
               Iesus
               .
            
          
           
             Gesture
             is
             either
             in
             the
             action
             of
             the
             voyce
             or
             of
             the
             bodie
             .
          
           
             The
             voyce
             ought
             to
             be
             so
             high
             ,
             that
             all
             may
             heare
             .
             Isai.
             58.
             1.
             
             
               Crie
               aloud
               ,
               and
               spare
               not
               :
               lift
               vp
               thy
               voyce
               like
               a
               trumpet
               .
            
             Iohn
             7.
             37.
             
             
               In
               that
               last
               and
               great
               day
               of
               the
               feast
               Iesus
               stood
               vp
               and
               cried
               ,
            
             Act.
             2.
             14.
             
             
               And
               Peter
               standing
               with
               the
               eleuen
               lift
               vp
               his
               voyce
               and
               said
               .
            
          
           
             In
             the
             doctrine
             hee
             ought
             to
             bee
             more
             moderate
             ,
             in
             the
             exhortation
             more
             feruent
             and
             vehement
             .
          
           
             Let
             there
             be
             that
             grauitie
             in
             the
             gesture
             of
             the
             body
             ,
             which
             may
             grace
             the
             Messenger
             of
             God.
             It
             is
             fit
             therefore
             ,
             that
             the
             trunke
             or
             stalke
             of
             the
             bodie
             being
             erect
             and
             quiet
             ,
             all
             the
             other
             parts
             ,
             as
             the
             arme
             ,
             the
             hand
             ,
             the
             face
             and
             eyes
             haue
             such
             motions
             ,
             as
             may
             expresse
             and
             (
             as
             it
             were
             )
             vtter
             the
             godly
             affections
             of
             the
             heart
             .
             The
             
             lifting
             vp
             of
             the
             eye
             and
             the
             hand
             signifieth
             confidence
             .
             2.
             
             Chron.
             6.
             13.
             
             
               Salomon
               made
               a
               brazen
               scaffold
               ,
               and
               set
               it
               in
               the
               middest
               of
               the
               court
               —
               and
               vpon
               it
               hee
               stoode
               ,
               and
               kneeleddowne
               vpon
               his
               knees
               before
               all
               the
               congregation
               of
               Israel
               ,
               and
               stretched
               out
               his
               hands
               towards
               heauen
               .
               14.
               
               And
               said
               ,
               O
               Lord
               God
               of
               Israel
               ,
               &c.
               
            
             Act.
             7.
             55.
             
             
               And
               Steuen
               being
               full
               of
               the
               holy
               Ghost
               ,
               bending
               his
               eies
               vp
               to
               heauen
               beheld
               the
               glory
               of
               God.
            
             The
             casting
             downe
             of
             the
             eyes
             signifieth
             sorrow
             and
             heauines
             .
             Luk.
             18.
             13.
             
             
               But
               the
               Publican
               standing
               afarre
               off
               would
               not
               so
               much
               as
               lift
               vp
               his
               eyes
               vnto
               heauen
               ,
               but
               hee
               smote
               his
               breast
               saying
               ,
               God
               be
               mercifull
               to
               me
               a
               sinner
               .
            
          
           
             Concerning
             the
             gesture
             other
             precepts
             cannot
             be
             deliuered
             ;
             only
             ,
             let
             the
             ensample
             of
             the
             grauest
             Ministers
             in
             this
             kind
             be
             in
             stead
             of
             a
             Rule
             .
          
        
         
           
           
             CHAP.
             XI
             .
          
           
             
               Of
               conceiuing
               of
               Prayer
               .
            
          
           
             HItherto
             hath
             bin
             spoken
             cōcerning
             Preaching
             of
             the
             word
             :
             it
             remaineth
             now
             to
             speake
             of
             the
             conceiuing
             of
             praiers
             :
             which
             is
             the
             second
             part
             of
             Prophecying
             ,
             whereby
             the
             Minister
             is
             the
             voyce
             of
             the
             people
             in
             calling
             vpon
             God.
             Luk.
             11.
             1.
             
             
               One
               of
               his
               Disciples
               said
               vnto
               him
               ,
               Lord
               ,
               teach
               vs
               to
               pray
               ,
               as
               Iohn
               also
               taught
               his
               Disciples
               .
            
             1.
             
             Sam.
             14.
             24.
             
          
           
             Here
             are
             to
             be
             considered
             :
          
           
             1.
             
             The
             matter
             thereof
             ,
             first
             the
             wants
             and
             sinnes
             of
             the
             people
             :
             and
             then
             the
             graces
             of
             God
             and
             the
             blessings
             they
             stand
             in
             neede
             of
             .
             1.
             
             Tim.
             2.
             1.
             
             
               I
               exhort
               therefore
               aboue
               all
               things
               ,
               that
               supplications
               —
               be
               made
               for
               all
               men
               .
               2.
               
               For
               Kings
               and
               those
               that
               are
               in
               authoritie
               .
               Tertul.
               Apolog.
            
             saith
             ,
             
               Wee
               doe
               all
               pray
               for
               all
               Emperours
               ,
               that
               they
               may
               obtaine
               a
               long
               life
               ,
               a
               quiet
               raigne
               ,
               a
               safe
               familie
               ,
               couragious
               armies
               ,
               a
               
               faithfull
               Counsell
               ,
               loyall
               subiects
               ,
               a
               peaceable
               world
               ,
               and
               whatsoeuer
               things
               are
               desired
               of
               a
               man
               and
               of
               Caesar
               ,
            
             Againe
             :
             
               Wee
               pray
               for
               Emperours
               ,
               for
               their
               ministers
               and
               powers
               ,
               for
               the
               state
               of
               the
               time
               ,
               for
               the
               quietnes
               of
               their
               affaires
               ,
               and
               for
               the
               delaying
               of
               their
               death
               .
            
             The
             Lords
             prayer
             reduceth
             this
             matter
             to
             sixe
             heads
             ,
             which
             are
             Gods
             glorie
             ,
             kingdome
             ,
             obedience
             ,
             the
             preseruation
             of
             the
             life
             ,
             the
             remission
             of
             sinnes
             ,
             and
             the
             strengthning
             of
             the
             spirit
             .
          
           
             2
             The
             forme
             thereof
             .
             1.
             
             Let
             there
             be
             one
             voyce
             ,
             and
             that
             the
             Ministers
             alone
             ,
             the
             people
             being
             in
             the
             meane
             while
             silent
             ,
             and
             shewing
             their
             assent
             at
             the
             end
             ,
             by
             saying
             Amen
             .
             Act.
             4.
             24.
             
             
               Who
               when
               they
               had
               heard
               these
               things
               ,
               they
               lift
               vp
               their
               voyce
               with
               one
               accord
               vnto
               God
               ,
               and
               said
               ,
               &c.
            
             Nehem.
             8.
             6.
             
             
               And
               Ezra
               praised
               the
               Lord
               the
               great
               God
               ,
               and
               all
               the
               people
               answered
               ,
               Amen
               ,
               Amen
               .
            
             1.
             
             Cor.
             14.
             16.
             
             
               Else
               ,
               when
               thou
               blessest
               with
               the
               spirit
               ,
               how
               shall
               he
               that
               supplieth
               the
               place
               of
               the
               vnlearned
               say
               Amen
               at
               thy
               giuing
               of
               thankes
               .
               Iustine
            
             in
             his
             2.
             
             Apolog.
             to
             Antoninus
             ,
             saith
             :
             
               When
               the
            
             (
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             )
             
               President
               hath
               finished
               his
               prayers
               and
               thankes-giuings
               ,
               all
               
               the
               people
               that
               are
               present
               ,
               crie
               out
               with
               a
               fauourable
               approbation
               ,
               saying
               ,
               Amen
               .
               Athanasius
               Apolog.
               ad
               Constant.
               Imp.
               Euseb.
               lib.
               7.
               cap.
               8.
               
               Ierome
               Prooem
               .
               2.
               in
               Gal.
               
            
          
           
             2.
             
             Let
             the
             voyce
             bee
             vnderstood
             .
             1.
             
             Cor.
             14.
             15.
             
             
               I
               will
               pray
               with
               the
               spirit
               ,
               I
               will
               pray
               also
               with
               the
               vnderstanding
               :
               I
               will
               sing
               with
               the
               spirit
               ,
               I
               will
               sing
               with
               the
               vnderstanding
               also
               .
            
          
           
             3.
             
             Let
             the
             voice
             be
             continued
             ,
             not
             iagged
             and
             abrupt
             ,
             that
             idle
             repetitions
             may
             be
             auoided
             ,
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
             Matth.
             6.
             7.
             
          
           
             4.
             
             The
             parts
             ,
             which
             are
             three
             :
             Consideration
             ,
             Ordering
             ,
             and
             Vttering
             of
             it
             .
          
           
             Consideration
             is
             that
             ,
             whereby
             fit
             matter
             for
             the
             framing
             of
             prayers
             is
             diligently
             searched
             for
             .
          
           
             Ordering
             is
             that
             ,
             whereby
             the
             matter
             being
             found
             out
             is
             disposed
             in
             the
             mind
             in
             a
             certaine
             order
             .
          
           
             Prolation
             or
             vttring
             of
             it
             is
             that
             ,
             whereby
             it
             is
             orderly
             pronounced
             in
             publike
             to
             the
             edifying
             of
             the
             people
             .
          
           
             Trin-vni
             Deo
             Gloria
             .
          
        
      
       
         
         
           THE
           ORDER
           AND
           SVMME
           of
           the
           sacred
           and
           only
           methode
           
             of
             Preaching
          
           .
        
         
           1.
           
           
             To
             read
             the
             Text
             distinctly
             out
             of
             the
             Canonicall
             Scriptures
             .
          
        
         
           2.
           
           
             To
             giue
             the
             sense
             and
             vnderstanding
             of
             it
             being
             read
             ,
             by
             the
             Scripture
             it selfe
             .
          
        
         
           3.
           
           
             To
             collect
             a
             few
             and
             profitable
             points
             of
             doctrine
             out
             of
             the
             naturall
             sense
             .
          
        
         
           4.
           
           
             To
             applie
             (
             if
             he
             haue
             the
             gift
             )
             the
             doctrines
             rightly
             collected
             to
             the
             life
             and
             manners
             of
             men
             ,
             in
             a
             simple
             and
             plaine
             speech
             .
          
        
         
           The
           Summe
           of
           the
           Summe
           .
        
         
           
             Preach
             one
             Christ
             by
             Christ
             to
             the
             praise
             of
             Christ.
             
          
        
         
           The
           Writers
           which
           lent
           their
           helpe
           to
           the
           framing
           of
           this
           Arte
           of
           Prophecying
           are
           :
        
         
           
             Augustine
             ,
             Hemingius
             ,
             Hyperius
             ,
             Erasmus
             ,
             Illyricus
             ,
             Wigandus
             ,
             Iacobus
             Matthias
             ,
             Theodorus
             Beza
             ,
             Franciscus
             Iunius
             .
          
        
         
           Soli
           Deo
           gloria
           .
        
         
      
    
     
       
         Notes, typically marginal, from the original text
         
           Notes for div A09449-e10
           
             1
             
          
           
             2
             
          
           
             3
             
          
           
             4
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09449-e240
           
             Exo.
             10.
             21.
             
          
           
             Psa.
             147.
             19
             
          
           
             Exo.
             13.
             22
             
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09449-e440
           
             *
             or
             when
             .
          
        
         
           Notes for div A09449-e2330
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Or
             ,
             the
             word
             of
             God
             is
             the
             whole
             and
             onely
             matter
             ,
             about
             which
             preaching
             is
             exercised
             :
             it
             is
             the
             field
             in
             which
             the
             Preacher
             must
             containe
             himselfe
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             The
             Maior
             ,
             or
             Proposition
             .
          
           
             *
             The
             Minor
             or
             Assumption
             .
          
           
             *
             The
             conclusion
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Eeclesiastes
             .
          
           
             *
             The
             booke
             of
             Canticles
             .
          
           
             *
             Or
             husband
             and
             spouse
             .
          
           
             *
             That
             is
             ,
             the
             Prophets
             
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Probatio
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             &
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             3500.
             
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Opening
             of
             the
             text
             .
          
           
             *
             Of
             sound
             iu
             de
             ement
             :
             or
             sound
             ,
             &
             iudicious
             ,
             and
             consonant
             to
             Gods
             word
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             occulta
             .
          
           
             *
             quia
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             *
             irata
             .
          
           
             *
             Vexillum
             .
          
           
             *
             loafe
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Signi
             .
             Beneplaciti
             .
          
           
             *
             Vbique
             passim
             .
          
           
             *
             Non.
             
          
           
             *
             That
             is
             ,
             when
             one
             or
             moe
             words
             are
             wanting
             .
          
           
             *
             VVhen
             some
             words
             abound
             .
          
           
             *
             It
             is
             when
             vvords
             signifie
             more
             then
             shew
             for
             or
             seem
             .
          
           
             *
             Coiunctio
             .
          
           
             *
             They
             inlarge
             the
             sense
             .
          
           
             *
             It
             is
             when
             the
             contrarie
             to
             that
             which
             was
             spoken
             is
             meant
             ,
             it
             is
             used
             in
             slouting
             sometimes
             .
          
           
             *
             That
             is
             ,
             the
             second
             foureteenth
             generation
             ,
             mentioned
             in
             Mat.
             1.
             17
             in
             vvhich
             place
             three
             fourteeene
             generations
             are
             set
             down
             
          
           
             *
             
               De
               iure
            
             .
             according
             to
             law
             or
             equitie
             .
          
           
             *
             That
             is
             ,
             as
             fully
             finished
             ,
             or
             as
             but
             in
             the
             finishing
             .
          
           
             Vltimi
             ann●
             .
          
           
             *
             To
             vnderstand
             this
             ,
             reade
             Deut.
             25.
             5.
             
          
           
             These
             Aduerbs
             and
             Coniunctions
             I
             doe
             of
             purpose
             not
             translate
             ,
             as
             being
             fittest
             in
             Latin.
             
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Rom.
             15.
             4
             
          
           
             *
             Or
             general
             .
          
           
             *
             Or
             specials
             and
             particulars
             of
             that
             kind
             or
             generall
             .
          
           
             *
             Aduerb
             .
             any
             thing
             out
             of
             any
             thing
             ,
             
               quidlibetè
               quolibet
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             he
             hath
             created
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             ,
             be
             hath
             possessed
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Euangelicè
             .
          
           
             *
             Indefinenter
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Or
             ,
             though
             but.
             
          
           
             *
             Godly
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Sopitam
             fidem
             .
          
           
             Isa.
             1.
             1
             ,
             2
             ,
             3
             ,
             4.
             
          
           
             *
             i.
             If
             it
             be
             limited
             and
             meant
             to
             them
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Improouing
             ,
             confuting
             .
          
           
             *
             Or
             gouernment
             of
             the
             familie
             ,
             oiconomia
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
               〈◊〉
            
             .
          
           
             *
             Memoriter
             .
          
           
             *
             Non
             verba
             ,
             sed
             virtutem
             .
          
           
             *
             In
             verse
             .